Mercurial > emacs
annotate etc/ONEWS @ 36867:caefed147f99
Spelling corrections.
author | Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org> |
---|---|
date | Mon, 19 Mar 2001 12:48:55 +0000 |
parents | 061a65fa5a43 |
children | 19880a4faa73 |
rev | line source |
---|---|
25853 | 1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 1992. |
35782
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
2 Copyright (C) 1995, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
25853 | 3 See the end for copying conditions. |
4 | |
33644 | 5 For older news, see the file ONEWS.4. |
25853 | 6 |
35782
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
7 * Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
8 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
9 * Changes in Emacs 19.33. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
10 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
11 ** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
12 mode should do that--it is the user's choice.) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
13 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
14 ** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
15 use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
16 Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
17 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
18 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
19 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
20 ** C-x f with no argument now signals an error. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
21 To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
22 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
23 ** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
24 conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
25 matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
26 expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
27 word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
28 all caps. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
29 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
30 ** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
31 at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
32 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
33 When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
34 does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
35 as in previous Emacs versions. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
36 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
37 ** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
38 non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
39 time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
40 frames. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
41 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
42 ** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
43 if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
44 This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
45 Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
46 accident. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
47 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
48 ** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
49 keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
50 It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
51 line and then executing the macro. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
52 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
53 This command is not new, but was never documented before. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
54 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
55 ** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
56 (something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
57 characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
58 characters. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
59 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
60 ** Font Lock mode |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
61 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
62 *** Font Lock support modes |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
63 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
64 Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
65 below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
66 hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
67 to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
68 Font Lock mode is enabled. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
69 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
70 For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
71 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
72 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
73 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
74 in your ~/.emacs. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
75 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
76 *** lazy-lock |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
77 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
78 The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
79 only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
80 becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
81 Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
82 occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
83 buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
84 Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
85 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
86 To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
87 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
88 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
89 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
90 To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
91 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
92 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
93 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
94 *** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
95 paren and key. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
96 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
97 *** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
98 supported. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
99 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
100 ** Gnus changes. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
101 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
102 Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
103 commands and variables have been added. There should be no |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
104 significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
105 previously released version, except in the message composition area. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
106 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
107 Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
108 between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
109 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
110 *** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
111 variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
112 obsolete. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
113 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
114 *** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
115 missing articles are represented by empty nodes. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
116 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
117 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
118 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
119 *** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
120 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
121 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
122 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
123 *** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
124 referred. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
125 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
126 *** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
127 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
128 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
129 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
130 *** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
131 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
132 (setq gnus-use-trees t) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
133 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
134 *** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
135 buffers. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
136 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
137 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
138 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
139 *** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
140 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
141 `M-x gnus-binary-mode' |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
142 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
143 *** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
144 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
145 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
146 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
147 *** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
148 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
149 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
150 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
151 *** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
152 is possible. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
153 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
154 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
155 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
156 *** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
157 groups of groups. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
158 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
159 *** Caching is possible in virtual groups. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
160 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
161 *** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
162 batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
163 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
164 *** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
165 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
166 *** The Gnus cache is much faster. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
167 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
168 *** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
169 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
170 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
171 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
172 *** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
173 expiration times. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
174 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
175 *** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
176 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
177 *** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
178 process marked articles on the `M P' submap. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
179 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
180 *** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
181 articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
182 bound to keys on the `/' submap. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
183 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
184 *** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
185 articles with the `*' command. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
186 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
187 *** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
188 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
189 *** Article headers can be buttonized. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
190 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
191 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
192 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
193 *** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
194 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
195 *** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
196 `nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
197 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
198 *** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
199 buffer. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
200 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
201 *** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
202 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
203 *** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
204 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
205 *** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
206 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
207 (setq gnus-use-nocem t) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
208 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
209 *** Groups can be made permanently visible. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
210 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
211 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:") |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
212 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
213 *** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
214 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
215 *** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
216 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
217 *** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
218 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
219 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
220 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
221 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
222 *** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
223 refetching. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
224 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
225 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
226 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
227 *** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
228 buffer to allow easier treatment. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
229 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
230 *** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
231 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
232 *** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
233 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
234 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
235 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
236 *** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
237 articles. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
238 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
239 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
240 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
241 *** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
242 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
243 *** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
244 cited text to hide is now customizable. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
245 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
246 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
247 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
248 *** Boring headers can be hidden. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
249 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
250 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
251 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
252 *** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
253 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
254 *** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
255 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
256 The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
257 in greater detail. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
258 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
259 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
260 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
261 ** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
262 second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
263 asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
264 exists. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
265 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
266 ** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
267 as well as lists. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
268 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
269 ** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
270 of a given keymap. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
271 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
272 ** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
273 given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
274 keymap or nil. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
275 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
276 ** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
277 an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real" |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
278 name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
279 menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
280 equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
281 alias. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
282 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
283 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
284 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
285 ** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
286 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
287 Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
288 This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
289 was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
290 far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
291 pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
292 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
293 For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
294 you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
295 `http://www.vtw.org/'. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
296 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
297 ** A note about C mode indentation customization. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
298 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
299 The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
300 do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
301 It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
302 much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
303 chapter of the manual for details. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
304 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
305 However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
306 customization variables take effect. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
307 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
308 ** Marking with the mouse. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
309 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
310 When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
311 highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
312 using M-x transient-mark-mode. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
313 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
314 ** Improved Windows NT/95 support. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
315 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
316 *** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
317 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
318 *** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
319 to work on NT only and not on 95.) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
320 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
321 *** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
322 in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
323 you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
324 application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
325 applications, these problems are significant. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
326 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
327 If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
328 likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
329 However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
330 will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
331 other DOS application as a subprocess. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
332 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
333 Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
334 You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
335 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
336 If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
337 subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
338 have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
339 Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
340 separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
341 Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
342 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
343 ** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
344 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
345 This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
346 which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
347 minibuffer contains. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
348 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
349 ** `title' frame parameter and resource. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
350 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
351 The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
352 It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
353 It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
354 affects just the displayed title of the frame. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
355 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
356 The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
357 it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
358 and also serves as the default for the displayed title |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
359 when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
360 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
361 ** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
362 enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer). |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
363 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
364 ** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
365 F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
366 Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
367 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
368 If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
369 menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
370 something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
371 the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
372 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
373 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
374 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
375 ** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
376 to replace the characters it "deletes". |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
377 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
378 ** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
379 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
380 ** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
381 a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
382 select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
383 It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
384 immediately after the selected one. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
385 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
386 This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
387 made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
388 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
389 ** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
390 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
391 Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
392 directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
393 If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
394 Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
395 recover-session. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
396 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
397 You can turn off the writing of these files by setting |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
398 auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
399 will not work. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
400 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
401 Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
402 normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
403 this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
404 bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
405 now that the bug is fixed. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
406 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
407 ** Changes to Version Control (VC) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
408 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
409 There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
410 when you visit a link to a file that is under version control. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
411 Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
412 which is dangerous and probably not what you want. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
413 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
414 If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
415 telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default), |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
416 VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
417 the link is visited and a warning displayed. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
418 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
419 ** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
420 Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
421 is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters). |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
422 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
423 There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
424 Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
425 enable only the accent characters needed for particular language. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
426 The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
427 remain normal. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
428 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
429 ** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
430 header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...). |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
431 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
432 Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
433 known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
434 offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
435 Followup-To usually just holds one of those. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
436 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
437 Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
438 of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
439 a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
440 name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
441 documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
442 `mail-directory-stream'.) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
443 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
444 ** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
445 skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
446 characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
447 with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
448 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
449 Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
450 - to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
451 wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results). |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
452 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
453 The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
454 less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
455 headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit / |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
456 Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
457 Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
458 fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
459 to a limitation in font-lock). |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
460 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
461 External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
462 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
463 ** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
464 buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
465 buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
466 this example: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
467 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
468 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
469 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index"))) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
470 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
471 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
472 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
473 *** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
474 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
475 *** Font Lock mode is now supported. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
476 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
477 *** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
478 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
479 *** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
480 entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
481 will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
482 isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
483 (bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
484 The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
485 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
486 *** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
487 does the same job. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
488 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
489 *** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author = |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
490 "Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
491 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
492 *** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
493 text. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
494 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
495 ** Font Lock mode |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
496 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
497 *** Global Font Lock mode |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
498 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
499 Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
500 new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
501 font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
502 turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
503 on globally where the buffer mode supports it. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
504 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
505 For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
506 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
507 (global-font-lock-mode t) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
508 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
509 in your ~/.emacs. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
510 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
511 *** Local Refontification |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
512 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
513 In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
514 However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
515 those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
516 command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block). |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
517 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
518 In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
519 (The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
520 current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
521 above and below point. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
522 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
523 With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
524 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
525 ** Follow mode |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
526 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
527 Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
528 buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
529 side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
530 they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
531 split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
532 follow-mode. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
533 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
534 M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
535 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
536 To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
537 command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
538 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
539 ** hide-show changes. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
540 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
541 The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
542 to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
543 normal hooks. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
544 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
545 ** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
546 The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
547 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
548 ** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
549 recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
550 those that begin a function, record, or macro. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
551 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
552 ** MSDOS Changes |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
553 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
554 *** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
555 Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
556 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
557 *** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
558 and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
559 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
560 *** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
561 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
562 *** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
563 pressing both mouse buttons. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
564 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
565 *** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
566 restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
567 are: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
568 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
569 **** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
570 now works. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
571 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
572 **** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode). |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
573 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
574 **** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
575 implementation of Emacs timers, see below). |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
576 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
577 **** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
578 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
579 **** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
580 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
581 **** `M-x recover-session' works. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
582 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
583 **** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
584 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
585 **** The `TPU-EDT' package works. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
586 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
587 * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
588 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
589 ** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
590 tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
591 remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
592 this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
593 behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
594 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
595 ** Change in system-type and system-configuration values. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
596 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
597 The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux', |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
598 not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type' |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
599 need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
600 be different. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
601 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
602 It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
603 than `system-type'. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
604 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
605 See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
606 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
607 ** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
608 now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
609 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
610 ** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
611 that pointed into or next to the deleted text. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
612 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
613 ** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
614 no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
615 reliably and can be used for shorter time delays. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
616 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
617 The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
618 to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
619 like this: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
620 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
621 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
622 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
623 SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
624 It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
625 becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
626 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
627 REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
628 seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
629 means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
630 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
631 *** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
632 up if too much time passes. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
633 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
634 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
635 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
636 This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
637 If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
638 of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
639 form in BODY. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
640 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
641 *** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
642 a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
643 call looks like this: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
644 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
645 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
646 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
647 SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
648 runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
649 timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
650 ARGS. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
651 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
652 Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
653 command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
654 command. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
655 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
656 REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
657 time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
658 does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
659 each time Emacs becomes idle. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
660 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
661 If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
662 idle for SECS seconds. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
663 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
664 *** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
665 all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
666 programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
667 instead. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
668 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
669 *** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
670 there is no answer within a certain time. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
671 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
672 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
673 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
674 asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
675 within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
676 Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
677 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
678 ** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
679 arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
680 meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
681 arguments in between are ignored. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
682 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
683 This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
684 the list of arguments for `encode-time'. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
685 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
686 ** The default value of load-path now includes the directory |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
687 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
688 /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
689 site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
690 version. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
691 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
692 It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
693 version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
694 for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
695 has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
696 and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
697 problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
698 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
699 ** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
700 .abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
701 systems with limited file name syntax. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
702 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
703 Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
704 convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
705 for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
706 completions.el: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
707 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
708 (defvar save-completions-file-name |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
709 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions") |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
710 "*The filename to save completions to.") |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
711 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
712 This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
713 depends on the operating system, because the definition of |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
714 convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
715 Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
716 MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
717 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
718 ** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
719 rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
720 minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
721 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
722 ** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
723 marker from its buffer position. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
724 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
725 ** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
726 Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
727 The default is nil, meaning there are no messages. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
728 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
729 ** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
730 that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
731 condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
732 of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
733 matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
734 regardless of the value of debug-on-error. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
735 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
736 This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
737 errors that happen often during editing. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
738 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
739 ** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
740 into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
741 puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
742 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
743 ** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
744 now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
745 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
746 ** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
747 a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
748 name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
749 to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc., |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
750 and not get-buffer-window. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
751 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
752 ** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
753 calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
754 being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
755 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
756 If you use this feature, you should set the variable |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
757 buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
758 property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
759 non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
760 are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
761 property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
762 over and over for the same text. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
763 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
764 ** Changes in lisp-mnt.el |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
765 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
766 *** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
767 in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
768 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
769 ;; @(#) HEADER: text |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
770 ;; $HEADER: text $ |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
771 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
772 in addition to the normal |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
773 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
774 ;; HEADER: text |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
775 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
776 *** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
777 checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
778 lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
779 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
780 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
781 |
25853 | 782 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.30. |
783 | |
784 ** Be sure to recompile your byte-compiled Emacs Lisp files | |
785 if you last compiled them with Emacs 19.28 or earlier. | |
786 You can use M-x byte-force-recompile to recompile all the .elc files | |
787 in a specified directory. | |
788 | |
789 ** Emacs now provides multiple-frame support on Windows NT | |
790 and Windows 95. | |
791 | |
792 ** M-x column-number-mode toggles a minor mode which displays | |
793 the current column number in the mode line. | |
794 | |
795 ** Line Number mode is now enabled by default. | |
796 | |
797 ** M-x what-line now displays the line number in the accessible | |
798 portion of the buffer as well as the line number in the full buffer, | |
799 when narrowing is in effect. | |
800 | |
801 ** If you type a M-x command that has an equivalent key binding, | |
802 the equivalent is shown in the minibuffer before the command executes. | |
803 This feature is enabled by default for the sake of beginning users. | |
804 You can turn the feature off by setting suggest-key-bindings to nil. | |
805 | |
806 ** The menu bar is now visible on text-only terminals. To choose a | |
807 command from the menu bar when you have no mouse, type M-` | |
808 (Meta-Backquote) or F10. To turn off menu bar display, | |
809 do (menu-bar-mode -1). | |
810 | |
811 ** Whenever you invoke a minibuffer, it appears in the minibuffer | |
812 window that the current frame uses. | |
813 | |
814 Emacs can only use one minibuffer window at a time. If you activate | |
815 the minibuffer while a minibuffer window is active in some other | |
816 frame, the outer minibuffer window disappears while the inner one is | |
817 active. | |
818 | |
819 ** Echo area messages always appear in the minibuffer window that the | |
820 current frame uses. If a minibuffer is active in some other frame, | |
821 the echo area message does not hide it even temporarily. | |
822 | |
823 ** The minibuffer now has a menu-bar menu. You can use it to exit or | |
824 abort the minibuffer, or to ask for completion. | |
825 | |
826 ** Dead-key and composite character processing is done in the standard | |
827 X11R6 manner (through the default "input method" using the | |
828 /usr/lib/X11/locale/*/Compose databases of key combinations). I.e. if | |
829 it works in xterm, it should also work in emacs now. | |
830 | |
831 ** Mouse changes | |
832 | |
833 *** You can now use the mouse when running Emacs in an xterm. | |
834 Use M-x xterm-mouse-mode to let emacs take control over the mouse. | |
835 | |
836 *** C-mouse-1 now once again provides a menu of buffers to select. | |
837 S-mouse-1 is now the way to select a default font for the frame. | |
838 | |
839 *** There is a new mouse-scroll-min-lines variable to control the | |
840 minimum number of lines scrolled by dragging the mouse outside a | |
841 window's edge. | |
842 | |
843 *** Dragging mouse-1 on a vertical line that separates windows | |
844 now moves the line, thus changing the widths of the two windows. | |
845 (This feature is available only if you don't have vertical scroll bars. | |
846 If you do use them, a scroll bar separates two side-by-side windows.) | |
847 | |
848 *** Double-click mouse-1 on a character with "symbol" syntax (such as | |
849 underscore, in C mode) selects the entire symbol surrounding that | |
850 character. (Double-click mouse-1 on a letter selects a whole word.) | |
851 | |
852 ** When incremental search wraps around to the beginning (or end) of | |
853 the buffer, if you keep on searching until you go past the original | |
854 starting point of the search, the echo area changes from "Wrapped" to | |
855 "Overwrapped". That tells you that you are revisiting matches that | |
856 you have already seen. | |
857 | |
858 ** Filling changes. | |
859 | |
860 *** If the variable colon-double-space is non-nil, the explicit fill | |
861 commands put two spaces after a colon. | |
862 | |
863 *** Auto-Fill mode now supports Adaptive Fill mode just as the | |
864 explicit fill commands do. The variable adaptive-fill-regexp | |
865 specifies a regular expression to match text at the beginning of | |
866 a line that should be the fill prefix. | |
867 | |
868 *** Adaptive Fill mode can take a fill prefix from the first line of a | |
869 paragraph, *provided* that line is not a paragraph-starter line. | |
870 | |
871 Paragraph-starter lines are indented lines that start a new | |
872 paragraph because they are indented. This indentation shouldn't | |
873 be copied to additional lines. | |
874 | |
875 Whether indented lines are paragraph lines depends on the value of the | |
876 variable paragraph-start. Some major modes set this; you can set it | |
877 by hand or in mode hooks as well. For editing text in which paragraph | |
878 first lines are not indented, and which contains paragraphs in which | |
879 all lines are indented, you should use Indented Text mode or arrange | |
880 for paragraph-start not to match these lines. | |
881 | |
882 *** You can specify more complex ways of choosing a fill prefix | |
883 automatically by setting `adaptive-fill-function'. This function | |
884 is called with point after the left margin of a line, and it should | |
885 return the appropriate fill prefix based on that line. | |
886 If it returns nil, that means it sees no fill prefix in that line. | |
887 | |
888 ** Gnus changes. | |
889 | |
890 Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has been rewritten and expanded. Most | |
891 things that worked with the old version should still work with the new | |
892 version. Code that relies heavily on Gnus internals is likely to | |
893 fail, though. | |
894 | |
895 *** Incompatibilities with the old GNUS. | |
896 | |
897 **** All interactive commands have kept their names, but many internal | |
898 functions have changed names. | |
899 | |
900 **** The summary mode gnus-uu commands have been moved from the `C-c | |
901 C-v' keymap to the `X' keymap. | |
902 | |
903 **** There can now be several summary buffers active at once. | |
904 Variables that are relevant to each summary buffer are buffer-local to | |
905 that buffer. | |
906 | |
907 **** Old hilit code doesn't work at all. Gnus performs its own | |
908 highlighting based not only on what's visible in the buffer, but on | |
909 other data structures. | |
910 | |
911 **** Old packages like `expire-kill' will no longer work. | |
912 | |
913 **** `C-c C-l' in the group buffer no longer switches to a different | |
914 buffer, but instead lists killed groups in the group buffer. | |
915 | |
916 *** New features. | |
917 | |
918 **** The look of all buffers can be changed by setting format-like | |
919 variables. | |
920 | |
921 **** Local spool and several NNTP servers can be used at once. | |
922 | |
923 **** Groups can be combined into virtual groups. | |
924 | |
925 **** Different mail formats can be read much the same way as one would | |
926 read newsgroups. All the mail backends implement mail expiry schemes. | |
927 | |
928 **** Gnus can use various strategies for gathering threads that have | |
929 lost their roots (thereby gathering loose sub-threads into one thread) | |
930 or it can go back and retrieve enough headers to build a complete | |
931 thread. | |
932 | |
933 **** Killed groups can be read. | |
934 | |
935 **** Gnus can do partial group updates - you do not have to retrieve | |
936 the entire active file just to check for new articles in a few groups. | |
937 | |
938 **** Gnus implements a sliding scale of subscribedness to groups. | |
939 | |
940 **** You can score articles according to any number of criteria. You | |
941 can get Gnus to score articles for you using adaptive scoring. | |
942 | |
943 **** Gnus maintains a dribble buffer that is auto-saved the normal | |
944 Emacs manner, so it should be difficult to lose much data on what you | |
945 have read if your machine should go down. | |
946 | |
947 **** Gnus now has its own startup file (`.gnus.el') to avoid | |
948 cluttering up the `.emacs' file. | |
949 | |
950 **** You can set the process mark on both groups and articles and | |
951 perform operations on all the marked items. | |
952 | |
953 **** You can grep through a subset of groups and create a group from | |
954 the results. | |
955 | |
956 **** You can list subsets of groups using matches on group names or | |
957 group descriptions. | |
958 | |
959 **** You can browse foreign servers and subscribe to groups from those | |
960 servers. | |
961 | |
962 **** Gnus can pre-fetch articles asynchronously on a second connection | |
963 to the servers. | |
964 | |
965 **** You can cache articles locally. | |
966 | |
967 **** Gnus can fetch FAQs to and descriptions of groups. | |
968 | |
969 **** Digests (and other files) can be used as the basis for groups. | |
970 | |
971 **** Articles can be highlighted and customized. | |
972 | |
973 ** Changes to Version Control (VC) | |
974 | |
975 *** General changes (all backends). | |
976 | |
977 VC directory listings (C-x v d) are now kept up to date when you do a | |
978 vc-next-action (C-x v v) on the marked files. The `g' command updates | |
979 the buffer properly. `=' in a VC dired buffer produces a version | |
980 control diff, not an ordinary diff. | |
981 | |
982 *** CVS changes. | |
983 | |
984 Under CVS, you no longer need to type C-x C-q before you can edit a | |
985 file. VC doesn't write-protect unmodified buffers anymore; you can | |
986 freely change them at any time. The mode line keeps track of the | |
987 file status. | |
988 | |
989 If you do want unmodified files to be write-protected, set your | |
990 CVSREAD environment variable. VC sees this and behaves accordingly; | |
991 that will give you the behaviour of Emacs 19.29, similar to that under | |
992 RCS and SCCS. In this mode, if the variable vc-mistrust-permissions | |
993 is nil, VC learns the modification state from the file permissions. | |
994 When setting CVSREAD for the first time, you should check out the | |
995 whole module anew, so that the file permissions are set correctly. | |
996 | |
997 VC also works with remote repositories now. When you visit a file, it | |
998 doesn't run "cvs status" anymore, so there shouldn't be any long delays. | |
999 | |
1000 Directory listings under VC/CVS have been enhanced. Type C-x v d, and | |
1001 you get a list of all files in or below the current directory that are | |
1002 not up-to-date. The actual status (modified, merge, conflict, ...) is | |
1003 displayed for each file. If you give a prefix argument (C-u C-x v d), | |
1004 up-to-date files are also listed. You can mark any number of files, | |
1005 and execute the next logical version control command on them (C-x v v). | |
1006 | |
1007 *** Starting a new branch. | |
1008 | |
1009 If you try to lock a version that is not the latest on its branch, | |
1010 VC asks for confirmation in the minibuffer. If you say no, it offers | |
1011 to lock the latest version instead. | |
1012 | |
1013 *** RCS non-strict locking. | |
1014 | |
1015 VC can now handle RCS non-strict locking, too. In this mode, working | |
1016 files are always writable and you needn't lock the file before making | |
1017 changes, similar to the default mode under CVS. To enable non-strict | |
1018 locking for a file, use the "rcs -U" command. | |
1019 | |
1020 *** Sharing RCS master files. | |
1021 | |
1022 If you share RCS subdirs with other users (through symbolic links), | |
1023 and you always want to work on the latest version, set | |
1024 vc-consult-headers to nil and vc-mistrust-permissions to `t'. | |
1025 Then you see the state of the *latest* version on the mode line, not | |
1026 that of your working file. When you do a check out, VC overwrites | |
1027 your working file with the latest version from the master. | |
1028 | |
1029 *** RCS customization. | |
1030 | |
1031 There is a new variable vc-consult-headers. If it is t (the default), | |
35782
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
1032 VC searches for RCS headers in working files (like `$Id: ONEWS,v 1.4 2000/11/20 16:15:34 gerd Exp $') and |
25853 | 1033 determines the state of the file from them, not from the master file. |
1034 This is fast and more reliable when you use branches. (The variable | |
1035 was already present in Emacs 19.29, but didn't get mentioned in the | |
1036 NEWS.) | |
1037 | |
1038 ** Calendar changes. | |
1039 | |
1040 *** New calendars supported: Chinese, Coptic, Ethiopic | |
1041 | |
1042 Here are the commands for converting to and from these calendars: | |
1043 | |
1044 gC: calendar-goto-chinese-date | |
1045 gk: calendar-goto-coptic-date | |
1046 ge: calendar-goto-ethiopic-date | |
1047 | |
1048 pC: calendar-print-chinese-date | |
1049 pk: calendar-print-coptic-date | |
1050 pe: calendar-print-ethiopic-date | |
1051 | |
1052 *** Printed calendars | |
1053 | |
1054 Calendar mode now has commands to produce fancy printed calendars via | |
1055 LaTeX. You can ask for a calendar for one or more days, weeks, months | |
1056 or years. The commands all start with `t'; see the manual for a list | |
1057 of them. | |
1058 | |
1059 *** New sexp diary entry type | |
1060 | |
1061 Reminders that apply in the days leading up to an event. | |
1062 | |
1063 ** The CC-mode package now provides the default C and C++ modes. | |
1064 See the manual for documentation of its features. | |
1065 | |
1066 ** The uniquify package chooses buffer names differently when you | |
1067 visit multiple files with the same name (in different directories). | |
1068 | |
1069 ** RMAIL now always uses the movemail program when it renames an | |
1070 inbox file, so that it can interlock properly with the mailer | |
1071 no matter where it is delivering mail. | |
1072 | |
1073 ** tex-start-of-header and tex-end-of-header are now regular expressions, | |
1074 not strings. | |
1075 | |
1076 ** To enable automatic uncompression of compressed files, | |
1077 type M-x auto-compression-mode. (This command used to be called | |
1078 toggle-auto-compression, but was not documented before.) In Lisp, | |
1079 you can do | |
1080 | |
1081 (auto-compression-mode 1) | |
1082 | |
1083 to turn the mode on. | |
1084 | |
1085 ** The new pc-select package emulates the key bindings for cutting and | |
1086 pasting, and selection of regions, found in Windows, Motif, and the | |
1087 Macintosh. | |
1088 | |
1089 ** Help buffers now use a special major mode, Help mode. This mode | |
1090 normally turns on View mode; it also provides a hook, help-mode-hook, | |
1091 which you can use for other customization. | |
1092 | |
1093 ** Apropos now uses faces for enhanced legibility. It now describes | |
1094 symbol properties as well as their function definitions and variable | |
1095 values. You can use Mouse-2 or RET to get more information about a | |
1096 function definition, variable, or property. | |
1097 | |
1098 ** Font Lock mode | |
1099 | |
1100 *** Supports Scheme, TCL and Help modes | |
1101 | |
1102 For example, to automatically turn on Font Lock mode in the *Help* | |
1103 buffer, put: | |
1104 | |
1105 (add-hook 'help-mode-hook 'turn-on-font-lock) | |
1106 | |
1107 in your ~/.emacs. | |
1108 | |
1109 *** Enhanced fontification | |
1110 | |
1111 The structure of font-lock-keywords is extended to allow "anchored" keywords. | |
1112 Typically, a keyword item of font-lock-keywords comprises a regexp to search | |
1113 for and information to specify how the regexp should be highlighted. However, | |
1114 the highlighting information is extended so that it can be another keyword | |
1115 item. This keyword item, its regexp and highlighting information, is processed | |
1116 before resuming with the keyword item of which it is part. | |
1117 | |
1118 For example, a typical keyword item might be: | |
1119 | |
1120 ("\\<anchor\\>" (0 anchor-face)) | |
1121 | |
1122 which fontifies each occurrence of the discrete word "anchor" in the value of | |
1123 the variable anchor-face. However, the highlighting information can be used to | |
1124 fontify text that is anchored to the word "anchor". For example: | |
1125 | |
1126 ("\\<anchor\\>" (0 anchor-face) ("\\=[ ,]*\\(item\\)" nil nil (1 item-face))) | |
1127 | |
1128 which fontifies each occurrence of "anchor" as above, but for each occurrence | |
1129 of "anchor", each occurrence of "item", in any following comma separated list, | |
1130 is fontified in the value of the variable item-face. Thus the "item" text is | |
1131 anchored to the "anchor" text. See the variable documentation for further | |
1132 information. | |
1133 | |
1134 This feature is used to extend the level and quality of fontification in a | |
1135 number of modes. For example, C/C++ modes now have level 3 decoration that | |
1136 includes the fontification of variable and function names in declaration lists. | |
1137 In this instance, the "anchor" described in the above example is a type or | |
1138 class name, and an "item" is a variable or function name. | |
1139 | |
1140 *** Fontification levels | |
1141 | |
1142 The variables font-lock-maximum-decoration and font-lock-maximum-size are | |
1143 extended to specify levels and sizes for specific modes. The variable | |
1144 font-lock-maximum-decoration specifies the preferred level of fontification for | |
1145 modes that provide multiple levels (typically from "subdued" to "gaudy"). The | |
1146 variable font-lock-maximum-size specifies the buffer size for which buffer | |
1147 fontification is suppressed when Font Lock mode is turned on (typically because | |
1148 it would take too long). | |
1149 | |
1150 These variables can now specify values for individual modes, by supplying | |
1151 lists of mode names and values. For example, to use the above mentioned level | |
1152 3 decoration for buffers in C/C++ modes, and default decoration otherwise, put: | |
1153 | |
1154 (setq font-lock-maximum-decoration '((c-mode . 3) (c++-mode . 3))) | |
1155 | |
1156 in your ~/.emacs. Maximum buffer size values for individual modes are | |
1157 specified in the same way with the variable font-lock-maximum-size. | |
1158 | |
1159 *** Font Lock configuration | |
1160 | |
1161 The mechanism to provide default settings for Font Lock mode are the variables | |
1162 font-lock-defaults and font-lock-maximum-decoration. Typically, you should | |
1163 only need to change the value of font-lock-maximum-decoration. However, to | |
1164 support Font Lock mode for buffers in modes that currently do not support Font | |
1165 Lock mode, you should set a buffer local value of font-lock-defaults for that | |
1166 mode, typically via its mode hook. | |
1167 | |
1168 These variables are used by Font Lock mode to set the values of the variables | |
1169 font-lock-keywords, font-lock-keywords-only, font-lock-syntax-table, | |
1170 font-lock-beginning-of-syntax-function and font-lock-keywords-case-fold-search. | |
1171 | |
1172 You need not set these variables directly, and should not set them yourself | |
1173 since the underlining mechanism may change in future. | |
1174 | |
1175 ** Archive mode is now the default mode for various sorts of | |
1176 archive files (files whose names end with .arc, .lzh, .zip, and .zoo). | |
1177 | |
1178 ** You can automatically update the years in copyright notice by | |
1179 means of (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'copyright-update). | |
1180 Optionally it can update the GPL version as well. | |
1181 | |
1182 ** Scripts of various languages (Shell, AWK, Perl, makefiles ...) can | |
1183 be automatically provided with a magic number and be made executable | |
1184 by their respective modes under control of various user variables. | |
1185 The mode must call (executable-set-magic "perl") or | |
1186 (executable-set-magic "make" "-f"). The latter for example has no | |
1187 effect on [Mm]akefile. | |
1188 | |
1189 ** Shell script mode now supports over 15 different shells. The new | |
1190 command C-c ! executes the region, and optionally beginning of script | |
1191 as well, by passing them to the shell. | |
1192 | |
1193 Cases such as `sh' being a `bash' are now accounted for. | |
1194 Fontification now also does variables, the magic number and all | |
1195 builtin commands. Shell script mode no longer mingles `tab-width' and | |
1196 indentation style. The variable `sh-tab-width' has been renamed to | |
1197 `sh-indentation'. Empty lines are now indented like previous | |
1198 non-empty line, rather than just previous line. | |
1199 | |
1200 The annoying $ variable prompting has been eliminated. Instead, shell | |
1201 script mode uses `comint-dynamic-completion' for commands, variables | |
1202 and filenames. | |
1203 | |
1204 ** Two-column mode now automatically scrolls both buffers together, | |
1205 which makes it possible to eliminate the special scrolling commands | |
1206 that used to do so. | |
1207 | |
1208 The commands that operate in two-column mode are no longer bound to | |
1209 keys outside that mode. f2 o will now position at the same point in | |
1210 associated buffer. | |
1211 | |
1212 the new command f2 RET inserts a newline in both buffers, at point and | |
1213 at the corresponding position in the associated buffer. | |
1214 | |
1215 ** Skeleton commands now work smoothly as abbrev definitions. The | |
1216 element < no longer exists, ' is a new element. | |
1217 | |
1218 ** The autoinsert insert facility for prefilling empty files as soon | |
1219 as they are found has been extended to accommodate skeletons or calling | |
1220 functions. See the function auto-insert. | |
1221 | |
1222 ** TPU-edt Changes | |
1223 | |
1224 Loading tpu-edt no longer turns on tpu-edt mode. In fact, it is no | |
1225 longer necessary to explicitly load tpu-edt. All you need to do to | |
1226 turn on tpu-edt is run the tpu-edt function. Here's how to run | |
1227 tpu-edt instead of loading the file: | |
1228 | |
1229 Running Emacs: Type emacs -f tpu-edt | |
1230 not emacs -l tpu-edt | |
1231 | |
1232 Within Emacs: Type M-x tpu-edt <ret> | |
1233 not M-x load-library <ret> tpu-edt <ret> | |
1234 | |
1235 In .emacs: Use (tpu-edt) | |
1236 not (load "tpu-edt") | |
1237 | |
1238 The default name of the tpu-edt X key definition file has changed from | |
1239 ~/.tpu-gnu-keys to ~/.tpu-keys. If you don't rename the file yourself, | |
1240 tpu-edt will offer to rename it the first time you invoke it under | |
1241 x-windows. | |
1242 | |
1243 ** MS-DOS Enhancements: | |
1244 | |
1245 *** Better mouse control by adding the following functions [in dosfns.c] | |
1246 msdos-mouse-enable, msdos-mouse-disable, msdos-mouse-init. | |
1247 | |
1248 *** If another foreground/background color than the default is setup in | |
1249 your ~/_emacs, then the screen briefly flickers with the default | |
1250 colors before changing to the colors you have specified. To avoid | |
1251 this, the EMACSCOLORS environment variable exists. It shall be | |
1252 defined as a string with the following elements: | |
1253 | |
1254 set EMACSCOLORS=fb;fb | |
1255 | |
1256 The first set of "fb" defines the initial foreground and background | |
1257 colors using standard dos color numbers (0=black,.., 7=white). | |
1258 If specified, the second set of "fb" defines the colors which are | |
1259 restored when you leave emacs. | |
1260 | |
1261 *** The new SUSPEND environment variable can now be set as the shell to | |
1262 use when suspending emacs. This can be used to override the stupid | |
1263 limitation on the environment of sub-shells in MS-DOS (they are just | |
1264 large enough to hold the currently defined variables, not leaving | |
1265 room for more); to overcome this limitation, add this to autoexec.bat: | |
1266 | |
1267 set SUSPEND=%COMSPEC% /E:2000 | |
1268 | |
1269 ** The escape character can now be displayed on X frames. Try | |
1270 this: | |
1271 (aset standard-display-table 27 (vector 27)) | |
1272 after first creating a display table (you can do that by loading | |
1273 the disp-table library). | |
1274 | |
1275 ** The new command-line option --eval specifies an expression to evaluate | |
1276 from the command line. | |
1277 | |
1278 ** etags has now the ability to tag Perl files. They are recognised | |
1279 either by the .pm and .pl suffixes or by a first line which starts | |
1280 with `#!' and specifies a Perl interpreter. The tagged lines are | |
1281 those beginning with the `sub' keyword. | |
1282 | |
1283 New suffixes recognised are .hpp for C++; .f90 for Fortran; .bib, | |
1284 .ltx, .TeX for TeX (.bbl, .dtx removed); .ml for Lisp; .prolog for | |
1285 prolog (.pl is now Perl). | |
1286 | |
1287 ** The files etc/termcap.dat and etc/termcap.ucb have been replaced | |
1288 with a new, merged, and much more comprehensive termcap file. The | |
1289 new file should include all the special entries from the old one. | |
1290 This new file is under active development as part of the ncurses | |
1291 project. If you have any questions about this file, or problems with | |
1292 an entry in it, email terminfo@ccil.org. | |
1293 | |
1294 * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.30. | |
1295 | |
1296 ** New Data Types | |
1297 | |
1298 *** There is a new data type called a char-table which is an array | |
1299 indexed by a character. Currently this is mostly equivalent to a | |
1300 vector of length 256, but in the future, when a wider character set is | |
1301 in use, it will be different. To create one, call | |
1302 (make-char-table SUBTYPE INITIAL-VALUE) | |
1303 | |
1304 SUBTYPE is a symbol that identifies the specific use of this | |
1305 character table. It can be any of these values: | |
1306 | |
1307 syntax-table | |
1308 display-table | |
1309 keyboard-translate-table | |
1310 case-table | |
1311 | |
1312 The function `char-table-subtype' returns the subtype of a char-table. | |
1313 You cannot alter the subtype of an existing char-table. | |
1314 | |
1315 A char-table has an element for each character code. It also has some | |
1316 "extra slots". The number of extra slots depends on the subtype and | |
1317 their use depends on the subtype. (Each subtype symbol has a | |
1318 `char-table-extra-slots' property that says how many extra slots to | |
1319 make.) Use (char-table-extra-slot TABLE N) to access extra slot N and | |
1320 (set-char-table-extra-slot TABLE N VALUE) to store VALUE in slot N. | |
1321 | |
1322 A char-table T can have a parent, which should be another char-table | |
1323 P. If you look for the value in T for character C, and the table T | |
1324 actually holds nil, P's element for character C is used instead. | |
1325 The functions `char-table-parent' and `set-char-table-parent' | |
1326 let you read or set the parent of a char-table. | |
1327 | |
1328 To scan all the values in a char-table, do not try to loop through all | |
1329 possible character codes. That would work for now, but will not work | |
1330 in the future. Instead, call map-char-table. (map-char-table | |
1331 FUNCTION TABLE) calls FUNCTION once for each character or character | |
1332 set that has a distinct value in TABLE. FUNCTION gets two arguments, | |
1333 RANGE and VALUE. RANGE specifies a range of TABLE that has one | |
1334 uniform value, and VALUE is the value in TABLE for that range. | |
1335 | |
1336 Currently, RANGE is always a vector containing a single character | |
1337 and it refers to that character alone. In the future, other kinds | |
1338 of ranges will occur. You can set the value for a given range | |
1339 with (set-char-table-range TABLE RANGE VALUE) and examine the value | |
1340 for a range with (char-table-range TABLE RANGE). | |
1341 | |
1342 *** Syntax tables are now represented as char-tables. | |
1343 All syntax tables other than the standard syntax table | |
1344 normally have the standard syntax table as their parent. | |
1345 Their subtype is `syntax-table'. | |
1346 | |
1347 *** Display tables are now represented as char-tables. | |
1348 Their subtype is `display-table'. | |
1349 | |
1350 *** Case tables are now represented as char-tables. | |
1351 Their subtype is `case-table'. | |
1352 | |
1353 *** The value of keyboard-translate-table may now be a char-table | |
1354 instead of a string. Normally the char-tables used for this purpose | |
1355 have the subtype `keyboard-translate-table', but that is not required. | |
1356 | |
1357 *** A new data type called a bool-vector is a vector of values | |
1358 that are either t or nil. To create one, do | |
1359 (make-bool-vector LENGTH INITIAL-VALUE) | |
1360 | |
1361 ** You can now specify, for each marker, how it should relocate when | |
1362 text is inserted at the place where the marker points. This is called | |
1363 the "insertion type" of the marker. | |
1364 | |
1365 To set the insertion type, do (set-marker-insertion-type MARKER TYPE). | |
1366 If TYPE is t, it means the marker advances when text is inserted. If | |
1367 TYPE is nil, it means the marker does not advance. (In Emacs 19.29, | |
1368 markers did not advance.) | |
1369 | |
1370 The function marker-insertion-type reports the insertion type of a | |
1371 given marker. The function copy-marker takes a second argument TYPE | |
1372 which specifies the insertion type of the new copied marker. | |
1373 | |
1374 ** When you create an overlay, you can specify the insertion type of | |
1375 the beginning and of the end. To do this, you can use two new | |
1376 arguments to make-overlay: front-advance and rear-advance. | |
1377 | |
1378 ** The new function overlays-in returns a list of the overlays that | |
1379 overlap a specified range of the buffer. The returned list includes | |
1380 empty overlays at the beginning of this range, as well as within the | |
1381 range. | |
1382 | |
1383 ** The new hook window-scroll-functions is run when a window has been | |
1384 scrolled. The functions in this list are called just before | |
1385 redisplay, after the new window-start has been computed. Each function | |
1386 is called with two arguments--the window that has been scrolled, and its | |
1387 new window-start position. | |
1388 | |
1389 This hook is useful for on-the-fly fontification and other features | |
1390 that affect how the redisplayed text will look when it is displayed. | |
1391 | |
1392 The window-end value of the window is not valid when these functions | |
1393 are called. The computation of window-end is byproduct of actual | |
1394 redisplay of the window contents, which means it has not yet happened | |
1395 when the hook is run. Computing window-end specially in advance for | |
1396 the sake of these functions would cause a slowdown. | |
1397 | |
1398 The hook functions can determine where the text on the window will end | |
1399 by calling vertical-motion starting with the window-start position. | |
1400 | |
1401 ** The new hook redisplay-end-trigger-functions is run whenever | |
1402 redisplay in window uses text that extends past a specified end | |
1403 trigger position. You set the end trigger position with the function | |
1404 set-window-redisplay-end-trigger. The functions are called with two | |
1405 arguments: the window, and the end trigger position. Storing nil for | |
1406 the end trigger position turns off the feature, and the trigger value | |
1407 is automatically reset to nil just after the hook is run. | |
1408 | |
1409 You can use the function window-redisplay-end-trigger to read a | |
1410 window's current end trigger value. | |
1411 | |
1412 ** The new function insert-file-contents-literally inserts the | |
1413 contents of a file without any character set translation or decoding. | |
1414 | |
1415 ** The new function safe-length computes the length of a list. | |
1416 It never gets an error--it treats any non-list like nil. | |
1417 If given a circular list, it returns an upper bound for the number | |
1418 of elements before the circularity. | |
1419 | |
1420 ** replace-match now takes a fifth argument, SUBEXP. If SUBEXP is | |
1421 non-nil, that says to replace just subexpression number SUBEXP of the | |
1422 regexp that was matched, not the entire match. For example, after | |
1423 matching `foo \(ba*r\)' calling replace-match with 1 as SUBEXP means | |
1424 to replace just the text that matched `\(ba*r\)'. | |
1425 | |
1426 ** The new keymap special-event-map defines bindings for certain | |
1427 events that should be handled at a very low level--as soon as they | |
1428 are read. The read-event function processes these events itself, | |
1429 and never returns them. | |
1430 | |
1431 Events that are handled in this way do not echo, they are never | |
1432 grouped into key sequences, and they never appear in the value of | |
1433 last-command-event or (this-command-keys). They do not discard a | |
1434 numeric argument, they cannot be unread with unread-command-events, | |
1435 they may not appear in a keyboard macro, and they are not recorded | |
1436 in a keyboard macro while you are defining one. | |
1437 | |
1438 These events do, however, appear in last-input-event immediately after | |
1439 they are read, and this is the way for the event's definition to find | |
1440 the actual event. | |
1441 | |
1442 The events types iconify-frame, make-frame-visible and delete-frame | |
1443 are normally handled in this way. | |
1444 | |
1445 ** encode-time now supports simple date arithmetic by means of | |
1446 out-of-range values for its SEC, MINUTE, HOUR, DAY, and MONTH | |
1447 arguments; for example, day 0 means the day preceding the given month. | |
1448 Also, the ZONE argument can now be a TZ-style string. | |
1449 | |
1450 ** command-execute and call-interactively now accept an optional third | |
1451 argument KEYS. If specified and non-nil, this specifies the key | |
1452 sequence containing the events that were used to invoke the command. | |
1453 | |
1454 ** The environment variable NAME, if set, now specifies the value of | |
1455 (user-full-name), when Emacs starts up. | |
1456 | |
1457 * User Editing Changes in Emacs 19.29 | |
1458 | |
1459 ** If you run out of memory. | |
1460 | |
1461 If you get the error message "Virtual memory exhausted", type C-x s. | |
1462 That way of saving files has the least additional memory needs. Emacs | |
1463 19.29 keeps a reserve of memory which it makes available when this | |
1464 error happens; that is to ensure that C-x s can complete its work. | |
1465 | |
1466 Once you have saved your data, you can exit and restart Emacs, or use | |
1467 M-x kill-some-buffers to free up space. If you kill buffers | |
1468 containing a substantial amount of text, you can go on editing. | |
1469 | |
1470 Do not use M-x buffer-menu to save or kill buffers when you are out of | |
1471 memory, because that needs a fair amount memory itself and you may not | |
1472 have enough to get it started. | |
1473 | |
1474 ** The format of compiled files has changed incompatibly. | |
1475 | |
1476 Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19.29 normally use a new format | |
1477 that will not work in older Emacs versions. You can compile files | |
1478 in the old format if you wish; see "Changes in compilation," below. | |
1479 | |
1480 ** Emacs 19.29 supports the DEC Alpha. | |
1481 | |
1482 ** Emacs runs on Windows NT. | |
1483 | |
1484 This port does not yet support windowing features. It works like a | |
1485 text-only terminal, but it does support a mouse. | |
1486 | |
1487 In general, support for non-GNU-like operating systems is not a high | |
1488 priority for the GNU project. We merged in the support for Windows NT | |
1489 because that system is expected to be very widely used. | |
1490 | |
1491 ** Emacs supports Motif widgets. | |
1492 | |
1493 You can build Emacs with Motif widgets by specifying --with-x-toolkit=motif | |
1494 when you run configure. | |
1495 | |
1496 Motif defines collections of windows called "tab groups", and uses the | |
1497 tab key and the cursor keys to move between windows in a tab group. | |
1498 Emacs naturally does not support this--it has other uses for the tab | |
1499 key and cursor keys. Emacs does not support Motif accelerators either, | |
1500 because it uses its normal keymap event binding features. | |
1501 | |
1502 We give higher priority to operation with a free widget set than to | |
1503 operation with a proprietary one. | |
1504 | |
1505 ** If Emacs or the computer crashes, you can recover all the files you | |
1506 were editing from their auto save files by typing M-x recover-session. | |
1507 This first shows you a list of recorded interrupted sessions. Move | |
1508 point to the one you choose, and type C-c C-c. | |
1509 | |
1510 Then recover-session asks about each of the files that were being | |
1511 edited during that session, asking whether to recover that file. If | |
1512 you answer y, it calls recover-file, which works in its normal | |
1513 fashion. It shows the dates of the original file and its auto-save | |
1514 file and asks once again whether to recover that file. | |
1515 | |
1516 When recover-session is done, the files you've chosen to recover | |
1517 are present in Emacs buffers. You should then save them. | |
1518 Only this--saving them--updates the files themselves. | |
1519 | |
1520 ** Menu bar menus now stay up if you click on the menu bar item and | |
1521 release the mouse button within a certain amount of time. This is in | |
1522 the X Toolkit version. | |
1523 | |
1524 ** The menu bar menus have been rearranged and split up to make for a | |
1525 better organization. Two new menu bar menus, Tools and Search, | |
1526 contain items that were formerly in the Files and Edit menus, as well | |
1527 as some that did not exist in the menu bar menus before. | |
1528 | |
1529 ** Emacs can now display on more than one X display at the same time. | |
1530 Use the command make-frame-on-display to create a frame, specifying | |
1531 which display to use. | |
1532 | |
1533 ** M-x talk-connect sets up a multi-user talk connection | |
1534 via Emacs. Specify the X display of the person you want to talk to. | |
1535 You can talk to any number of people (within reason) by using | |
1536 this command repeatedly to specify different people. | |
1537 | |
1538 Emacs does not make a fuss about security; the people who you talk to | |
1539 can use all Emacs features, including visiting and editing files. If | |
1540 this frightens you, don't use M-x talk-connect. | |
1541 | |
1542 ** The range of integer values is now at least 2**28 on all machines. | |
1543 This means the maximum size of a buffer is at least 2**27-1, | |
1544 or 134,217,727. | |
1545 | |
1546 ** When you start Emacs, you can now specify option names in | |
1547 long GNU form (starting with `--') and you can abbreviate the names. | |
1548 | |
1549 You can now specify the options in any order. | |
1550 The previous requirements about the order of options | |
1551 have been eliminated. | |
1552 | |
1553 The -L or --directory option lets you specify an additional | |
1554 directory to search for Lisp libraries (including libraries | |
1555 that you specify with the -l or --load options). | |
1556 | |
1557 ** Incremental search in Transient Mark mode, if the mark is already | |
1558 active, now leaves the mark active and does not change its position. | |
1559 You can make incremental search deactivate the mark once again with | |
1560 this expression. | |
1561 | |
1562 (add-hook 'isearch-mode-hook 'deactivate-mark) | |
1563 | |
1564 ** C-delete now deletes a word backwards. This is for compatibility | |
1565 with some editors in the PC world. (This key is not available on | |
1566 ordinary ASCII terminals, because C-delete is not a distinct character | |
1567 on those terminals.) | |
1568 | |
1569 ** ESC ESC ESC is now a command to escape from various temporary modes | |
1570 and states. | |
1571 | |
1572 ** M-x pc-bindings-mode sets up bindings compatible with many PC editors. | |
1573 In particular, Delete and its variants delete forward instead of backward. | |
1574 Use Backspace to delete backward. | |
1575 | |
1576 C-Backspace kills backward a word (as C-Delete normally would). | |
1577 M-Backspace does undo. | |
1578 Home and End move to beginning and end of line | |
1579 C-Home and C-End move to beginning and end of buffer. | |
1580 | |
1581 ** The key sequence for evaluating a Lisp expression using the minibuffer | |
1582 is now ESC :. It used to be ESC ESC, but we moved it to make way for | |
1583 the ESC ESC ESC feature, on the grounds that people who evaluate Lisp | |
1584 expressions are experienced users and can cope with a change. | |
1585 If you prefer the old ESC ESC binding, put in your `~/.emacs': | |
1586 | |
1587 (global-set-key "\e\e" 'eval-expression) | |
1588 | |
1589 ** The f1 function key is now equivalent to the help key. This is | |
1590 done with key-translation-map; delete the binding for f1 in that map | |
1591 if you want to use f1 for something else. | |
1592 | |
1593 ** Mouse-3, in the simplest case, still sets the region. But now, it | |
1594 places the mark where point was, and sets point where you click. | |
1595 (It used to set the mark where you click and leave point alone.) | |
1596 | |
1597 If you position point with Mouse-1, then scroll with the scroll bar | |
1598 and use Mouse-3, Mouse-3 uses the position you specified with Mouse-1 | |
1599 even if it has scrolled off the screen (and point is no longer there). | |
1600 This makes it easier to select a region with the mouse which is bigger | |
1601 than a screenful. | |
1602 | |
1603 Any editing of the buffer, and any cursor motion or scrolling for any | |
1604 reason other than the scroll bar, cancels the special state set up by | |
1605 Mouse-1--so that a subsequent Mouse-3 click will use the actual value | |
1606 of point. | |
1607 | |
1608 ** C-mouse-3 now pops up a mode-specific menu of commands--normally | |
1609 the same ones available in the mode's own menu bar menus. | |
1610 | |
1611 ** C-mouse-2 now pops up a menu of faces, indentation, justification, | |
1612 and certain other text properties. This menu is also available | |
1613 through the menu-bar Edit menu. It is meant for use with Enriched | |
1614 mode. | |
1615 | |
1616 *** You can use this menu to change the face of the region. | |
1617 You can also set the face of the region with the new M-g command. | |
1618 | |
1619 *** The menu also includes commands for indenting the region, | |
1620 which locally changes the values of left-margin and fill-column that | |
1621 are used. | |
1622 | |
1623 *** All fill functions now indent every line to the left-margin. If | |
1624 there is also a fill-prefix, that goes after the margin indentation. | |
1625 | |
1626 *** Open-line and newline also make sure that the lines they create | |
1627 are indented to the left margin. | |
1628 | |
1629 *** It also allows you to set the "justification" of the region: | |
1630 whether it should be centered, flush right, and so forth. The fill | |
1631 functions (including auto-fill-mode) will maintain the justification | |
1632 and indentation that you request. | |
1633 | |
1634 *** The new function `list-colors-display' shows you what colors are | |
1635 available. This is also accessible from the C-mouse-2 menu. | |
1636 | |
1637 ** You can now save and load files including their faces and other | |
1638 text-properties by using Enriched-mode. Files are saved in an | |
1639 extended version of the MIME text/enriched format. You can use the | |
1640 menus described above, or M-g and other keyboard commands, to | |
1641 alter the formatting information. | |
1642 | |
1643 ** C-mouse-1 now pops up the menu for changing the frame's default font. | |
1644 | |
1645 ** You can input Hyper, Super, Meta, and Alt characters, as well as | |
1646 non-ASCII control characters, on an ASCII-only terminal. | |
1647 To do this, use | |
1648 | |
1649 C-x @ h -- hyper | |
1650 C-x @ s -- super | |
1651 C-x @ m -- meta | |
1652 C-x @ a -- alt | |
1653 C-x @ S -- shift | |
1654 C-x @ c -- control | |
1655 | |
1656 These are not ordinary key sequences; they operate through | |
1657 function-key-map, which means they can be used even in the | |
1658 middle of an ordinary key sequence. | |
1659 | |
1660 ** Outline minor mode and Hideif mode now use C-c @ as their prefix | |
1661 character. | |
1662 | |
1663 ** Echo area messages are now logged in the "*Messages*" buffer. The | |
1664 size of this buffer is limited to message-log-max lines. | |
1665 | |
1666 ** RET in various special modes for read-only buffers that contain | |
1667 lists of items now selects the item point is on. These modes include | |
1668 Dired, Compilation buffers, Buffer-menu, Tar mode, and Occur mode. | |
1669 (In Info, RET follows the reference near point; in completion list | |
1670 buffers, RET chooses the completion around point.) | |
1671 | |
1672 ** set-background-color now updates the modeline face in a special | |
1673 way. If that face was previously set up to be reverse video, the | |
1674 reverse of the default face, then set-background-color updates it so | |
1675 that it remains the reverse of the default face. | |
1676 | |
1677 ** The functions raise-frame and lower-frame are now commands. | |
1678 When used interactively, they apply to the selected frame. | |
1679 | |
1680 ** M-x buffer-menu now displays the buffer list in the selected window. | |
1681 Use M-x buffer-menu-other-window to display it in another window. | |
1682 | |
1683 ** M-w followed by a kill command now *does not* append the text in | |
1684 the kill ring. In consequence, M-w followed by C-w works as you would | |
1685 expect: it leaves the top of the kill ring matching the region that | |
1686 you killed. | |
1687 | |
1688 ** In Lisp mode, the C-M-x command now executes defvar forms in a | |
1689 special way: it unconditionally sets the variable to the specified | |
1690 default value, if there is one. Normal execution of defvar does not | |
1691 alter the variable if it already has a non-void value. | |
1692 | |
1693 ** In completion list buffers, the left and right arrow keys run the | |
1694 new commands previous-completion and next-completion. They move one | |
1695 completion at a time. | |
1696 | |
1697 ** While doing completion in the minibuffer, the `prior' or `pageup' | |
1698 key switches to the completion list window. | |
1699 | |
1700 ** When you exit the minibuffer with empty contents, the empty string | |
1701 is not put in the minibuffer history. | |
1702 | |
1703 ** The default buffer for insert-buffer is now the "first" buffer | |
1704 other than the current one. If you have more than one window, this | |
1705 is a buffer visible in another window. (Usually it is the buffer | |
1706 that C-M-v would scroll.) | |
1707 | |
1708 ** The etags program is now capable of recording tags based on regular | |
1709 expressions provided on the command line. | |
1710 | |
1711 This new feature allows easy support for constructs not normally | |
1712 handled by etags, such as the macros frequently used in big C/C++ | |
1713 projects to define project-specific structures. It also enables the | |
1714 use of etags and TAGS files for languages not supported by etags. | |
1715 | |
1716 The Emacs manual section on Tags contains explanations and examples | |
1717 for Emacs's DEFVAR, VHDL, Cobol, Postscript and TCL. | |
1718 | |
1719 ** Various mode-specific commands that used to be bound to C-c LETTER | |
1720 have been moved. | |
1721 | |
1722 *** In gnus-uu mode, gnus-uu-interactive-scan-directory is now on C-c C-d, | |
1723 and gnus-uu-interactive-save-current-file is on C-c C-z. | |
1724 | |
1725 *** In Scribe mode, scribe-insert-environment is now on C-c C-v, | |
1726 scribe-chapter is on C-c C-c, scribe-subsection is on C-c C-s, | |
1727 scribe-section is on C-c C-t, scribe-bracket-region-be is on C-c C-e, | |
1728 scribe-italicize-word is on C-c C-i, scribe-bold-word is on C-c C-b, | |
1729 and scribe-underline-word is on C-c C-u. | |
1730 | |
1731 *** In Gomoku mode, gomoku-human-takes-back is now on C-c C-b, | |
1732 gomoku-human-plays is on C-c C-p, gomoku-human-resigns is on C-c C-r, | |
1733 and gomoku-emacs-plays is on C-c C-e. | |
1734 | |
1735 *** In the Outline mode defined in allout.el, | |
1736 outline-rebullet-current-heading is now on C-c *. | |
1737 | |
1738 ** M-s in Info now searches through the nodes of the Info file, | |
1739 just like s. The alias M-s was added so that you can use the same | |
1740 command for searches in both Info and Rmail. | |
1741 | |
1742 ** iso-acc.el now lets you enter inverted-! and inverted-? | |
1743 with the sequences ~! and ~?. | |
1744 | |
1745 ** M-x compare-windows now pushes mark in both windows before | |
1746 it starts moving point. | |
1747 | |
1748 ** There are two new commands in Dired, A (dired-do-search) | |
1749 and Q (dired-do-query-replace). These are similar to tags-search and | |
1750 tags-query-replace, but instead of searching the list of files that | |
1751 appears in a tags table, they search all the files marked in Dired. | |
1752 | |
1753 ** Changes to dabbrev. | |
1754 | |
1755 A new function, `dabbrev-completion' (bound to M-C-/), expands the | |
1756 unique part of an abbreviation. | |
1757 | |
1758 Dabbrev now looks for expansions in other buffers, looks for symbols | |
1759 instead of words and it works in the minibuffer. | |
1760 | |
1761 Dabbrev can be customized to work for shell scripts, with variables | |
1762 that sometimes have and sometimes haven't a leading "$". See the | |
1763 variable 'dabbrev-abbrev-skip-leading-regexp'. | |
1764 | |
1765 ** In Rmail, the command rmail-input-menu has been eliminated. The | |
1766 feature of selecting an Rmail file from a menu is now implemented in | |
1767 another way. | |
1768 | |
1769 ** Bookmarks changes. | |
1770 | |
1771 *** It now works to set bookmarks in Info nodes. | |
1772 | |
1773 *** Bookmarks can have annotations; type "C-h m" after doing | |
1774 "M-x list-bookmarks", for more information on annotations. | |
1775 | |
1776 *** The bookmark-jump popup menu function is now `bookmark-menu-jump', for | |
1777 those who bind it to a mouse click. | |
1778 | |
1779 *** The default bookmarks file name is now "~/.emacs.bmk". If you | |
1780 already have a bookmarks file, it will be renamed automagically when | |
1781 you next load it. | |
1782 | |
1783 ** New package, ps-print. | |
1784 | |
1785 The ps-print package generates PostScript printouts of buffers or | |
1786 regions, and includes face attributes such as color, underlining, | |
1787 boldface and italics in the printed output. | |
1788 | |
1789 ** New package, msb. | |
1790 | |
1791 The msb package provides a buffer-menu in the menubar with separate | |
1792 menus for different types of buffers. | |
1793 | |
1794 ** `cpp.el' is a new library that can highlight or hide parts of a C | |
1795 file according to C preprocessor conditionals. To try it, run the | |
1796 command M-x cpp-highlight-buffer. | |
1797 | |
1798 ** Changes in CC mode. | |
1799 | |
1800 *** c-set-offset and related functions and variables can now accept | |
1801 variable symbols. Also ++ and -- which mean 2* positive and negative | |
1802 c-basic-offset respectively. | |
1803 | |
1804 *** New variable, c-recognize-knr-p, which controls whether K&R C | |
1805 constructs will be recognized. Trying to recognize K&R constructs is a | |
1806 time hog so if you're programming strictly in ANSI C, set this | |
1807 variable to nil (it should already be nil in c++-mode). | |
1808 | |
1809 *** New variable, c-hanging-comment-ender-p for controlling | |
1810 c-fill-paragraph's behavior. | |
1811 | |
1812 *** New syntactic symbol: statement-case-open. This is assigned to lines | |
1813 containing an open brace just after a case/default label. | |
1814 | |
1815 *** New variable, c-progress-interval, which controls minibuffer update | |
1816 message displays during long re-indention. This is a new feature | |
1817 which prints percentage complete messages at specified intervals. | |
1818 | |
1819 ** Makefile mode changes. | |
1820 | |
1821 *** The electric keys are not enabled by default. | |
1822 | |
1823 *** There is now a mode-specific menu bar menu. | |
1824 | |
1825 *** The mode supports font-lock, add-log, and imenu. | |
1826 | |
1827 *** The command M-TAB does completion of target names and variable names. | |
1828 | |
1829 ** icomplete.el now works more like a minor mode. Use M-x icomplete-mode | |
1830 to turn it on and off. | |
1831 | |
1832 Icomplete now supports an `icomplete-minibuffer-setup-hook', which is | |
1833 run on minibuffer setup whenever icompletion will be occurring. This | |
1834 hook can be used to customize interoperation of icomplete with other | |
1835 minibuffer-specific packages, eg rsz-mini. See the doc string for | |
1836 more info. | |
1837 | |
1838 ** Ediff change. | |
1839 | |
1840 Use ediff-revision instead of vc-ediff. It also replaces rcs-ediff, | |
1841 for those who use that; if you want to use a version control package | |
1842 other than vc.el, you must set the variable | |
1843 ediff-version-control-package to specify which package. | |
1844 | |
1845 ** VC now supports branches with RCS. | |
1846 | |
1847 You can use C-u C-x C-q to select any branch or version by number. | |
1848 It reads the version number or branch number with the minibuffer, | |
1849 then checks out the file unlocked. | |
1850 | |
1851 Type C-x C-q again to lock the selected branch or version. | |
1852 When you check in changes to that branch or version, there are two | |
1853 possibilities: | |
1854 | |
1855 -- If you've selected a branch, or a version at the tip of a branch, | |
1856 then the new version adds to that branch. If you wish to create a | |
1857 new branch, use C-u C-x C-q to specify a version number when you check | |
1858 in the new version. | |
1859 | |
1860 -- If you've selected an inner version which is not the latest in its | |
1861 branch, then the new version automatically creates a new branch. | |
1862 | |
1863 ** VC now supports CVS as well as RCS and SCCS. | |
1864 | |
1865 Since there are no locks in CVS, some things behave slightly | |
1866 different when the backend is CVS. When vc-next-action is invoked | |
1867 in a directory handled by CVS, it does the following: | |
1868 | |
1869 If the file is not already registered, this registers it for version | |
1870 control. This does a "cvs add", but no "cvs commit". | |
1871 If the file is added but not committed, it is committed. | |
1872 If the file has not been changed, neither in your working area or | |
1873 in the repository, a message is printed and nothing is done. | |
1874 If your working file is changed, but the repository file is | |
1875 unchanged, this pops up a buffer for entry of a log message; when you | |
1876 finish the log message with C-c C-c, that checks in the resulting | |
1877 changes along with the log message as change commentary. A writable | |
1878 file remains in existence. | |
1879 | |
1880 If vc-next-action changes the repository file, it asks you | |
1881 whether to merge in the changes into your working copy. | |
1882 | |
1883 vc-directory, when started in a CVS file hierarchy, reports | |
1884 all files that are modified (and thus need to be committed). | |
1885 (When the backend is RCS or SCCS vc-directory reports all | |
1886 locked files). | |
1887 | |
1888 VC has no support for running the initial "cvs checkout" to get a | |
1889 working copy of a module. You can only use VC in a working copy of | |
1890 a module. | |
1891 | |
1892 You can disable the CVS support as follows: | |
1893 | |
1894 (setq vc-master-templates (delq 'vc-find-cvs-master vc-master-templates)) | |
1895 | |
1896 or by setting vc-handle-cvs to nil. | |
1897 | |
1898 This may be desirable if you run a non-standard version of CVS, or | |
1899 if CVS was compiled with FORCE_USE_EDITOR or (possibly) | |
1900 RELATIVE_REPOS. | |
1901 | |
1902 ** Comint and shell mode changes: | |
1903 | |
1904 *** Completion works with file names containing quoted characters. | |
1905 | |
1906 File names containing special characters (such as " ", "!", etc.) that are | |
1907 quoted with a "\" character are recognised during completion. Special | |
1908 characters are quoted when they are inserted during completion. | |
1909 | |
1910 *** You can use M-x comint-truncate-buffer to truncate the buffer. | |
1911 | |
1912 When this command is run, the buffer is truncated to a maximum number | |
1913 of lines, specified by the variable comint-buffer-maximum-size. Just | |
1914 like the command comint-strip-ctrl-m, this can be run automatically | |
1915 during process output by doing this: | |
1916 | |
1917 (add-hook 'comint-output-filter-functions | |
1918 'comint-truncate-buffer) | |
1919 | |
1920 ** Telnet mode buffer name changed. | |
1921 | |
1922 The buffer name for a Telnet buffer is now *telnet-HOST*, not | |
1923 *HOST-telnet*. This is for consistency with other Emacs packages. | |
1924 | |
1925 ** M-x man (man) is now faster and more robust. On systems where the | |
1926 entire man page is indented, the indentation is removed. | |
1927 | |
1928 The user option names that used to end in -p now end in -flag. The | |
1929 new names are: Man-reuse-okay-flag, Man-downcase-section-letters-flag, | |
1930 Man-circular-pages-flag. The Man-notify user option has been renamed to | |
1931 Man-notify-method and accepts one more value, `pushy', that just | |
1932 switches the current buffer to the manpage buffer, without switching | |
1933 frames nor changing your windows configuration. | |
1934 | |
1935 A new user option Man-fontify-manpage-flag disables fontification | |
1936 (thus speeding up man) when set to nil. Default is to fontify if a | |
1937 window system is used. Two new user options Man-overstrike-face | |
1938 (default 'bold) and Man-underline-face (default 'underline) can be set | |
1939 to the preferred faces to be used for the words that man overstrikes | |
1940 and underlines. Useful for those who like coloured man pages. | |
1941 | |
1942 Two new interactive functions are provided: Man-cleanup-manpage and | |
1943 Man-fontify-manpage. Both can be used on a buffer that contains the | |
1944 output of a `rsh host man manpage' command, or the output of an | |
1945 `nroff -man -Tman manpage' command to make them readable. | |
1946 Man-cleanup-manpage is faster, but does not fontify. | |
1947 | |
1948 ** The new function modify-face makes it easy to specify | |
1949 all the attributes of a face, all at once. | |
1950 | |
1951 ** Faces now support background stippling. | |
1952 | |
1953 Use the command set-face-stipple to specify the stipple-pattern for a | |
1954 face. Use face-stipple to access the specified stipple pattern. The | |
1955 existing face functions now handle the stipple pattern when | |
1956 appropriate. | |
1957 | |
1958 If you specify one of the standard gray colors as a face background | |
1959 color, and your display doesn't handle gray, Emacs automatically uses | |
1960 stipple instead to get the same effect. | |
1961 | |
1962 ** Changes in Font Lock mode. | |
1963 | |
1964 *** Fontification | |
1965 | |
1966 Two new default faces are provided; `font-lock-variable-name-face' and | |
1967 `font-lock-reference-face'. The face `font-lock-doc-string-face' has | |
1968 been removed since it is the same as the existing | |
1969 `font-lock-string-face'. Where appropriate, fontification | |
1970 automatically uses these new faces. | |
1971 | |
1972 Fontification via commands `font-lock-mode' and | |
1973 `font-lock-fontify-buffer' is now cleanly interruptible (i.e., with | |
1974 C-g). If you interrupt during the fontification process, the buffer | |
1975 remains in its previous modified state and all highlighting is removed | |
1976 from the buffer. | |
1977 | |
1978 For C/C++ modes, Font Lock mode is much faster but highlights much | |
1979 more. Other modes are faster/more extensive/more discriminatory, or a | |
1980 combination of these. | |
1981 | |
1982 To enable Font Lock mode, add the new function `turn-on-font-lock' in | |
1983 one of the following ways: | |
1984 | |
1985 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'turn-on-font-lock) | |
1986 | |
1987 Or for any visited file with: | |
1988 | |
1989 (add-hook 'find-file-hooks 'turn-on-font-lock) | |
1990 | |
1991 *** Supports color and grayscale displays | |
1992 | |
1993 Font Lock mode supports different ways of highlighting, depending on | |
1994 the type of display and background shade. Attributes (face color, | |
1995 bold, italic and underline, and display type and background mode) can | |
1996 be controlled either from Emacs Lisp or X resources. | |
1997 | |
1998 See the new variables `font-lock-display-type' and | |
1999 `font-lock-face-attributes'. | |
2000 | |
2001 *** Supports more modes | |
2002 | |
2003 The following modes are directly supported: | |
2004 | |
2005 ada-mode, asm-mode, bibtex-mode, c++-c-mode, c++-mode, c-mode, | |
2006 change-log-mode, compilation-mode, dired-mode, emacs-lisp-mode, | |
2007 fortran-mode, latex-mode, lisp-mode, mail-mode, makefile-mode, | |
2008 outline-mode, pascal-mode, perl-mode, plain-tex-mode, rmail-mode, | |
2009 rmail-summary-mode, scheme-mode, shell-mode, slitex-mode, tex-mode, | |
2010 texinfo-mode. | |
2011 | |
2012 See the new variables `font-lock-defaults-alist' and | |
2013 `font-lock-defaults'. | |
2014 | |
2015 Some modes support different levels of fontification. You can choose | |
2016 to use the minimum or maximum available decoration by changing the | |
2017 value of the new variable `font-lock-maximum-decoration'. | |
2018 | |
2019 Programmers are urged to make available to the community their own | |
2020 keywords for modes not yet supported. See font-lock.el for | |
2021 information about efficiency. | |
2022 | |
2023 *** fast-lock | |
2024 | |
2025 The fast-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by saving font choices | |
2026 in associated cache files. When you visit a file with Font Lock mode | |
2027 and Fast Lock mode turned on for the first time, the file's buffer is | |
2028 fontified as normal. When certain events occur (such as exiting | |
2029 Emacs), Fast Lock saves the highlighting in a cache file. When you | |
2030 subsequently visit this file, its cache is used to restore the | |
2031 highlighting. | |
2032 | |
2033 To use this package, put in your `~/.emacs': | |
2034 | |
2035 (add-hook 'font-lock-mode-hook 'turn-on-fast-lock) | |
2036 | |
2037 To control the use of caches, see the documentation for `fast-lock-mode'. | |
2038 | |
2039 ** You can tell pop-to-buffer to display certain buffers in the selected | |
2040 window rather than finding some other window to display them in. | |
2041 There are two variables you can use to specify these buffers. | |
2042 | |
2043 same-window-buffer-names holds a list of buffer names; if a buffer's | |
2044 name appears in this list, pop-to-buffer puts it in the selected window. | |
2045 | |
2046 same-window-regexps holds a list of regexps--if any one of them | |
2047 matches a buffer's name, then pop-to-buffer puts that buffer in the | |
2048 selected window. | |
2049 | |
2050 The default values of these variables are not nil: they list various | |
2051 buffers that normally appear, when you as for them, in the selected | |
2052 window. These include shell buffers, mail buffers, telnet buffers, | |
2053 and others. By removing elements from these variables, you can ask | |
2054 Emacs to display those buffers in separate windows. | |
2055 | |
2056 ** The special-display-buffer-names and special-display-regexps lists | |
2057 have been generalized. An element may now be a list. The car of the list | |
2058 is the buffer name or regular expression for matching buffer names. | |
2059 | |
2060 The cdr of the list can be an alist specifying additional frame | |
2061 parameters for use in constructing the special display frame. | |
2062 | |
2063 Alternatively, the cdr can have this form: | |
2064 | |
2065 (FUNCTION ARGS...) | |
2066 | |
2067 where FUNCTION is a symbol. Then the frame is constructed by calling | |
2068 FUNCTION; its first argument is the buffer, and its remaining | |
2069 arguments are ARGS. | |
2070 | |
2071 ** If the environment variable REPLYTO is set, its value is the default | |
2072 for mail-default-reply-to. | |
2073 | |
2074 ** When you send a message in Emacs, if you specify an Rmail file with | |
2075 the FCC: header field, Emacs converts the message to Rmail format | |
2076 before writing it. Thus, the file never contains anything but Rmail | |
2077 format messages. | |
2078 | |
2079 ** The new variable mail-from-style controls whether the From: header | |
2080 should include the sender's full name, and if so, which format to use. | |
2081 | |
2082 ** The new variable mail-personal-alias-file specifies the name of the | |
2083 user's personal aliases. This defaults to the file ~/.mailrc. | |
2084 mailabbrev.el used to have its own variable for this purpose | |
2085 (mail-abbrev-mailrc-file). That variable is no longer used. | |
2086 | |
2087 ** In Buffer-Menu mode, the d and C-d commands (which mark buffers for | |
2088 deletion) now accept a prefix argument which serves as a repeat count. | |
2089 | |
2090 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
2091 | |
2092 *** Reference keys can now be entered with TAB completion. All | |
2093 reference keys defined in that buffer and all labels that appear in | |
2094 crossreference entries are object to completion. | |
2095 | |
2096 *** Braces are supported as field delimiters in addition to quotes. | |
2097 BibTeX entries may have brace-delimited and quote-delimited fields | |
2098 intermixed. The delimiters generated for new entries are specified by | |
2099 the variables bibtex-field-left-delimiter and | |
2100 bibtex-field-right-delimiter on a buffer-local basis. Those variables | |
2101 default to braces, since it is easier to put quote accented characters | |
2102 (as the german umlauts) into a brace-delimited entry. | |
2103 | |
2104 *** The function bibtex-clean-entry can now be invoked with a prefix | |
2105 argument. In this case, a label is automatically generated from | |
2106 various fields in the record. If bibtex-clean-entry is invoked on a | |
2107 record without label, a label is also generated automatically. | |
2108 Various variables (all beginning with `bibtex-autokey-') control the | |
2109 creation of that key. The variable bibtex-autokey-edit-before-use | |
2110 determines, if the user is allowed to edit auto-generated reference | |
2111 keys before they are used. | |
2112 | |
2113 *** A New function bibtex-complete-string completes strings with | |
2114 respect to the strings defined in this buffer and a set of predefined | |
2115 strings (initialized to the string macros defined in the standard | |
2116 BibTeX style files) in the same way in which ispell-complete-word | |
2117 works with respect to words in a dictionary. Candidates for | |
2118 bibtex-complete-string are initialized from variable | |
2119 bibtex-predefined-strings and by parsing the files found in | |
2120 bibtex-string-files for @String definitions. | |
2121 | |
2122 *** Every reference/field pair has now attached a comment which | |
2123 appears in the echo area when this field is edited. These comments | |
2124 should provide useful hints for BibTeX usage, especially for BibTeX | |
2125 beginners. New variable bibtex-help-message determines if these help | |
2126 messages are to appear in the minibuffer when moving to a text entry. | |
2127 | |
2128 *** Inscriptions of menu bar changed from "Entry Types" to | |
2129 "Entry-Types" and "Bibtex Edit" to "BibTeX-Edit". | |
2130 | |
2131 *** The variable bibtex-include-OPTcrossref is now not longer a binary | |
2132 switch but a list of reference names which should contain a crossref | |
2133 field. E.g., you can tell bibtex-mode you want a crossref field for | |
2134 @InProceedings and @InBook entries but for no other. | |
2135 | |
2136 *** The function validate-bibtex-buffer was completely rewritten to | |
2137 validate if a buffer is syntactically correct. find-bibtex-duplicates | |
2138 is no longer a function itself but was moved into | |
2139 validate-bibtex-buffer. | |
2140 | |
2141 *** Cleaning a BibTeX entry tests, if necessary fields are there. | |
2142 E.g., if you tell bibtex-mode to include a crossref entry, some fields | |
2143 are optional which would be required without the crossref entry. If | |
2144 you now leave the crossref entry empty and do a bibtex-clean-entry | |
2145 with some now required fields left empty, version 2.0 of bibtex.el | |
2146 complains about the absence of these fields, whereas version 1.3 | |
2147 didn't. | |
2148 | |
2149 *** Default value for variables bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries and | |
2150 bibtex-sort-ignore-string-entries is now t. | |
2151 | |
2152 *** All interactive functions are renamed to begin with `bibtex-'. | |
2153 | |
2154 *** Keybindings with \C-c\C-e entry changed for unification. Often | |
2155 used reference types are now on control-modified keys, mediocre used | |
2156 types are on unmodified keys, seldom used types are on shift-modified | |
2157 keys and almost never used types on meta-modified keys. | |
2158 | |
2159 * Configuration Changes in Emacs 19.29 | |
2160 | |
2161 ** Emacs now uses directory /usr/local/share for most of its installed | |
2162 files. This follows a GNU convention for directory usage. | |
2163 | |
2164 ** The option --with-x11 is no longer supported. | |
2165 X11 is the only version of X that Emacs 19.29 supports; | |
2166 use --with-x if you need to request X support explicitly. | |
2167 (Normally this should not be necessary, since configure should | |
2168 automatically enable X support if X is installed on your machine.) | |
2169 | |
2170 ** If you use the site-init.el file to set the variable | |
2171 mail-host-address to a string in the dumped Emacs, that string becomes | |
2172 the default host address for initializing user-mail-address. | |
2173 It is used instead of the value of (system-name). | |
2174 | |
2175 * Lisp-Level Changes in Emacs 19.29 | |
2176 | |
2177 ** Basic Lisp | |
2178 | |
2179 *** The range of integer values is now at least 2**28 on all machines. | |
2180 This means the maximum size of a buffer is at least 2**27-1, | |
2181 or 134,217,727. | |
2182 | |
2183 *** You can now use Common Lisp syntax for the backquote and comma | |
2184 macros. Thus, you can now write `(x ,y z) instead of (` (x (, y) z)). | |
2185 | |
2186 The old syntax is still accepted. | |
2187 | |
2188 *** The new function rassoc is like assoc, except that it compares the | |
2189 key against the cdr of each alist element, where assoc would compare | |
2190 it against the car of each alist element. | |
2191 | |
2192 *** The new function unintern deletes a symbol from an obarray. The | |
2193 first argument can be the symbol to delete, or a string giving its | |
2194 name. The second argument specifies the obarray (nil means the | |
2195 current default obarray). | |
2196 | |
2197 If the specified symbol is not in the obarray, or if there's no symbol | |
2198 in the obarray matching the specified string, unintern does nothing | |
2199 and returns nil. If it does delete a symbol, it returns t. | |
2200 | |
2201 *** You can specify an alternative read function for use by load and | |
2202 eval-region by binding the variable load-read-function to some other | |
2203 function. This function should accept one argument just like read. | |
2204 If load-read-function is nil, load and eval-region use ordinary read. | |
2205 | |
2206 *** The new function `type-of' takes any object as argument, and | |
2207 returns a symbol identifying the type of that object--one of `symbol', | |
2208 `integer', `float', `string', `cons', `vector', `marker', `overlay', | |
2209 `window', `buffer', `subr', `compiled-function', | |
2210 `window-configuration', `process'. | |
2211 | |
2212 *** When you use eval-after-load for a file that is already loaded, it | |
2213 executes the FORM right away. As before, if the file is not yet | |
2214 loaded, it arranges to execute FORM if and when the file is loaded | |
2215 later. The result is: if you have called eval-after-load for a file, | |
2216 and if that file has been loaded, then regardless of the order of | |
2217 these two events, the specified form has been evaluated. | |
2218 | |
2219 *** The Lisp construct #@NUMBER now skips the next NUMBER characters, | |
2220 treating them as a comment. | |
2221 | |
2222 You would not want to use this in a file you edit by hand, but it is | |
2223 useful for commenting out parts of machine-generated files. | |
2224 | |
2225 *** Two new functions, `plist-get' and `plist-put', | |
2226 allow you to modify and retrieve values from lists formatted as property-lists. | |
2227 They work like `get' and `put', but operate on any list. | |
2228 `plist-put' returns the modified property-list; you must store it | |
2229 back where you got it. | |
2230 | |
2231 *** The new function add-to-list is called with two elements, | |
2232 a variable that holds a list and a new element. | |
2233 It adds the element to the list unless it is already present. | |
2234 It compares elements using `equal'. Here is an example: | |
2235 | |
2236 (setq foo '(a b)) => (a b) | |
2237 | |
2238 (add-to-list 'foo 'c) => (c a b) | |
2239 | |
2240 (add-to-list 'foo 'b) => (c a b) | |
2241 | |
2242 foo => (c a b) | |
2243 | |
2244 ** Changes in compilation. | |
2245 | |
2246 Functions and variables loaded from a byte-compiled file | |
2247 now refer to the file for their doc strings. | |
2248 | |
2249 This has a few consequences: | |
2250 | |
2251 -- Loading the file is faster and uses less memory. | |
2252 -- Reference to doc strings is a little slower (the same speed | |
2253 as reference to the doc strings of primitive and preloaded functions). | |
2254 -- The compiled files will not work in old versions of Emacs. | |
2255 -- If you move the compiled file after loading it, Emacs can no longer | |
2256 find these doc strings. | |
2257 -- If you alter the compiled file (such as by compiling a new | |
2258 version), then further access to documentation strings will get | |
2259 nonsense results. | |
2260 | |
2261 The byte compiler now optionally supports lazy loading of compiled | |
2262 functions' definitions. If you enable this feature when you compile, | |
2263 loading the compiled file does not actually bring the function | |
2264 definitions into core. Instead it creates references to the compiled | |
2265 file, and brings each function's definition into core the first time | |
2266 you call that function, or when you force it with the new function | |
2267 `fetch-bytecode'. | |
2268 | |
2269 Using the lazy loading feature has a few consequences: | |
2270 | |
2271 -- Loading the file is faster and uses less memory. | |
2272 -- Calling any function in the file for the first time is slower. | |
2273 -- If you move the compiled file after loading it, Emacs can no longer | |
2274 find the function definitions. | |
2275 -- If you alter the compiled file (such as by compiling a new | |
2276 version), then further access to functions not already loaded | |
2277 will get nonsense results. | |
2278 | |
2279 To enable the lazy loading feature, set up a non-nil file local | |
2280 variable binding for the variable `byte-compile-dynamic' in the Lisp | |
2281 source file. For example, put this on the first line: | |
2282 | |
2283 -*-byte-compile-dynamic: t;-*- | |
2284 | |
2285 It's a good idea to use the lazy loading feature for a file that | |
2286 contains many functions, most of which are not actually used by a | |
2287 given user in a given session. | |
2288 | |
2289 To turn off the basic feature of referring to the file for doc | |
2290 strings, set byte-compile-dynamic-docstrings to nil. You can do this | |
2291 globally, or for one source file by adding this to the first line: | |
2292 | |
2293 -*-byte-compile-dynamic-docstrings: nil;-*- | |
2294 | |
2295 ** Strings | |
2296 | |
2297 *** Do not pass integer arguments to `concat' (or `vconcat' or | |
2298 `append'). We are phasing out the old unrecommended support for | |
2299 integers as arguments to these functions, in preparation for treating | |
2300 numbers as single characters in a future release. To concatenate | |
2301 numbers in string form, use `number-to-string' first, or rewrite the | |
2302 call to use `format' instead of `concat'. | |
2303 | |
2304 *** The new function match-string returns the string of text matched at | |
2305 the given parenthesized expression by the last regexp search, or nil | |
2306 if there was no match. If the last match was by `string-match' on a | |
2307 string, the string must be given. Therefore, this function can be | |
2308 used in place of `buffer-substring' and `substring', when using | |
2309 `match-beginning' and `match-end' to find match positions. | |
2310 | |
2311 (match-string N) or (match-string N STRING) | |
2312 | |
2313 *** The function replace-match now accepts an optional fourth argument, | |
2314 STRING. Use this after performing string-match on STRING, to replace | |
2315 the portion of STRING that was matched. When used in this way, | |
2316 replace-match returns a newly created string which is the same as | |
2317 STRING except for the matched portion. | |
2318 | |
2319 *** The new function buffer-substring-no-properties | |
2320 is like buffer-substring except that the string it returns | |
2321 has no text properties. | |
2322 | |
2323 *** The function `equal' now considers two strings to be different | |
2324 if they don't have the same text properties. | |
2325 | |
2326 ** Completion | |
2327 | |
2328 *** all-completions now takes an optional fourth argument. | |
2329 If that argument is non-nil, completions that start with a space | |
2330 are ignored unless the initial string also starts with a space. | |
2331 (This used to happen unconditionally.) | |
2332 | |
2333 ** Local Variables | |
2334 | |
2335 *** Local hook variables. | |
2336 | |
2337 There is now a clean way to give a hook variable a buffer-local value. | |
2338 Call the function `make-local-hook' to do this. | |
2339 | |
2340 Once a hook variable is buffer-local, you can add hooks to it either | |
2341 globally or locally. run-hooks runs the local hook functions | |
2342 of the current buffer, then all the global hook functions. | |
2343 | |
2344 The functions add-hook and remove-hook take an additional optional | |
2345 argument LOCAL which says whether to add (or remove) a local hook | |
2346 function or a global one. | |
2347 | |
2348 Local hooks use t as an element of the (local) value of the hook | |
2349 variable as a flag meaning to use the global value also. | |
2350 | |
2351 *** The new function local-variable-p tells you whether a particular | |
2352 variable is buffer-local in the current buffer or a specified buffer. | |
2353 | |
2354 ** Editing Facilities | |
2355 | |
2356 *** The function copy-region-as-kill no longer sets this-command; | |
2357 as a result, a following kill command will not normally append | |
2358 to the text saved by copy-region-as-kill. | |
2359 | |
2360 *** Regular expression searching and matching no longer performs full | |
2361 Posix backtracking by default. They now stop with the first match found | |
2362 instead of looking for the longest match--just as they did in Emacs 18. | |
2363 The reason for this change is to get higher speed. | |
2364 | |
2365 There are new functions you can use if you really want to search or | |
2366 match with Posix behavior: posix-search-forward, | |
2367 posix-search-backward, posix-looking-at, and posix-string-match. Call | |
2368 these just like re-search-forward, re-search-backward, looking-at, and | |
2369 string-match. | |
2370 | |
2371 ** Files | |
2372 | |
2373 *** The new variable `format-alist' defines file formats, | |
2374 which are ways of translating between the data in a file and things | |
2375 (text, text-properties, and possibly other information) in a buffer. | |
2376 | |
2377 `format-alist' has one element for each format. Each element is a | |
2378 list like this: | |
2379 (NAME DOC-STRING REGEXP FROM-FN TO-FN MODIFY MODE-FN) | |
2380 containing the name of the format, a documentation string, a regular | |
2381 expression which is used to recognize files in that format, a decoding | |
2382 function, an encoding function, a flag that indicates whether the | |
2383 encoding function modifies the buffer, and a mode function. | |
2384 | |
2385 FROM-FN is called to decode files in that format; it gets two args, BEGIN | |
2386 and END, and can make any modifications it likes, returning the new | |
2387 end position. It must make sure that the beginning of the file no | |
2388 longer matches REGEXP, or else it will get called again. | |
2389 TO-FN is called to encode a region into that format; it is also passed BEGIN | |
2390 and END, and either returns a list of annotations as in | |
2391 `write-region-annotate-functions', or modifies the region and returns | |
2392 the new end position. | |
2393 MODIFY, if non-nil, means the TO-FN modifies the region. If nil, TO-FN may | |
2394 not make any changes and should return a list of annotations. | |
2395 | |
2396 `insert-file-contents' checks the beginning of the file that it is | |
2397 inserting to see if it matches one of the regexps. If so, then it | |
2398 calls the decoding function, and then looks for another match. When | |
2399 visiting a file, it also calls the mode function, and sets the | |
2400 variable `buffer-file-format' to the list of formats that the file | |
2401 used. | |
2402 | |
2403 `write-region' calls the encoding functions for each format in | |
2404 `buffer-file-format' before it writes the file. To save a file in a | |
2405 different format, either set `buffer-file-format' to a different | |
2406 value, or call the new function `format-write-file'. | |
2407 | |
2408 Since some encoding functions may be slow, you can request that | |
2409 auto-save use a format different from the buffer's default by setting | |
2410 the variable `auto-save-file-format' to the desired format. This will | |
2411 determine the format of all auto-save files. | |
2412 | |
2413 *** The new function file-ownership-preserved-p tells you whether | |
2414 deleting a file and recreating it would keep the file's owner | |
2415 unchanged. | |
2416 | |
2417 *** The new function file-regular-p returns t if a file | |
2418 is a "regular" file (not a directory, symlink, named pipe, | |
2419 terminal, or other I/O device). | |
2420 | |
2421 *** The new function file-name-sans-extension discards the extension | |
2422 of a file name. You call it with a file name, and returns a string | |
2423 lacking the extension. | |
2424 | |
2425 *** The variable path-separator is a string which says which | |
2426 character separates directories in a search path. It is ":" | |
2427 for Unix and GNU systems, ";" for MSDOG and Windows NT. | |
2428 | |
2429 ** Commands and Key Sequences | |
2430 | |
2431 *** Key sequences consisting of C-c followed by {, }, <, >, : or ; are | |
2432 now reserved for major modes. Sequences consisting of C-c followed by | |
2433 any other punctuation character are now meant for minor modes. We don't | |
2434 plan to convert all existing major modes to stop using those sequences, | |
2435 but we hope to keep them to a minimum. | |
2436 | |
2437 *** When the post-command-hook or the pre-command-hook gets an error, the error | |
2438 is silently ignored. Emacs no longer sets the hook variable to nil when this | |
2439 happens. Meanwhile, the hook functions can now alter the hook variable in | |
2440 a normal fashion; there is no need to do anything special. | |
2441 | |
2442 *** define-key, lookup-key, and various other functions for changing or | |
2443 looking up key bindings now let you write an event type with a list | |
2444 like (ctrl meta newline) or (meta ?d), as in XEmacs. (ctrl meta newline) | |
2445 is equivalent to the event type symbol C-M-newline, and (meta ?d) | |
2446 is equivalent to the character ?\M-d. | |
2447 | |
2448 *** The function event-convert-list converts a list such as | |
2449 (meta ?d) into the corresponding event type (a symbol or integer). | |
2450 | |
2451 *** In an interactive spec, `k' means to read a key sequence. In this | |
2452 key sequence, upper case characters and shifted function keys which | |
2453 have no bindings are converted to lower case if that makes them | |
2454 defined. | |
2455 | |
2456 The new interactive code `K' reads a key sequence similarly, but does | |
2457 not convert the last event. `K' is useful for reading a key sequence | |
2458 to be given a binding. | |
2459 | |
2460 *** The variable overriding-local-map now has no effect on the menu bar | |
2461 display unless overriding-local-map-menu-flag is non-nil. This is why | |
2462 incremental search no longer temporarily changes the menu bars. | |
2463 | |
2464 Note that overriding-local-map does still affect the execution of key | |
2465 sequences entered using the menu bar. So if you use | |
2466 overriding-local-map, and a menu bar key sequence comes in, you should | |
2467 make sure to clear overriding-local-map before that key sequence gets | |
2468 looked up and executed. But this is what you'd normally do anyway: | |
2469 programs that use overriding-local-map normally exit and "put back" | |
2470 any event such as menu-bar that they do not handle specially. | |
2471 | |
2472 *** The new variable `overriding-terminal-local-map' is like | |
2473 overriding-local-map, but is specific to a single terminal. | |
2474 | |
2475 *** delete-frame events. | |
2476 | |
2477 When you use the X window manager's "delete window" command, this now | |
2478 generates a delete-frame event. The standard definition of this event | |
2479 is a command that deletes the frame that received the event, and kills | |
2480 Emacs when the last visible or iconified frame is deleted. You can | |
2481 rebind the event to some other command if you wish. | |
2482 | |
2483 *** Two new types of events, iconify-frame and make-frame-visible, | |
2484 indicate that the user iconified or deiconified a frame with the | |
2485 window manager. Since the window manager has already done the work, | |
2486 the default definition for both event types in Emacs is to do nothing. | |
2487 | |
2488 ** Frames and X | |
2489 | |
2490 *** Certain Lisp variables are now local to an X terminal (in other | |
2491 words, all the screens of a single X server). The value in effect, at | |
2492 any given time, is the one that belongs to the terminal of the | |
2493 selected frame. The terminal-local variables are | |
2494 default-minibuffer-frame, system-key-alist, defining-kbd-macro, and | |
2495 last-kbd-macro. There is no way for Lisp programs to create others. | |
2496 | |
2497 The terminal-local variables cannot be buffer-local. | |
2498 | |
2499 *** When you create an X frame, for the `top' and `left' frame | |
2500 parameters, you can now use values of the form (+ N) or (- N), where N | |
2501 is an integer. (+ N) means N pixels to the right of the left edge of | |
2502 the screen and (- N) means N pixels to the left of the right edge. In | |
2503 both cases, N may be zero (exactly at the edge) or negative (putting | |
2504 the window partly off the screen). | |
2505 | |
2506 The function x-parse-geometry can return values of these forms | |
2507 for certain inputs. | |
2508 | |
2509 *** The variable menu-bar-file-menu has been renamed to | |
2510 menu-bar-files-menu to match the actual item that appears in the menu. | |
2511 (All the other such variable names do match.) | |
2512 | |
2513 *** The new function active-minibuffer-window returns the minibuffer window | |
2514 currently active, or nil if none is now active. | |
2515 | |
2516 *** In the functions next-window, previous-window, next-frame, | |
2517 previous-frame, get-buffer-window, get-lru-window, get-largest-window | |
2518 and delete-windows-on, if you specify 0 for the last argument, | |
2519 it means to consider all visible and iconified frames. | |
2520 | |
2521 *** When you set a frame's cursor type with modify-frame-parameters, | |
2522 you can now specify (bar . INTEGER) as the cursor type. This stands | |
2523 for a bar cursor of width INTEGER. | |
2524 | |
2525 *** The new function facep returns t if its argument is a face name | |
2526 (or if it is a vector such as is used internally by the Lisp code | |
2527 to represent a face). | |
2528 | |
2529 *** Each frame can now have a buffer-predicate function, | |
2530 which is the `buffer-predicate' frame parameter. | |
2531 When `other-buffer' looks for an alternative buffer, it considers | |
2532 only the buffers that fit the selected frame's buffer predicate (if it | |
2533 has one). This is useful for applications that make their own frames. | |
2534 | |
2535 *** When you create an X frame, you can now specify the frame parameter | |
2536 `display'. This says which display to put the frame on. The value | |
2537 should be a display name--a string of the form | |
2538 "HOST:DPYNUMBER.SCREENNUMBER". | |
2539 | |
2540 The functions x-server-... and x-display-... now take an optional | |
2541 argument which specifies the display to ask about. You can use either | |
2542 a display name string or a frame. A value of nil stands for the | |
2543 selected frame. | |
2544 | |
2545 To close the connection to an X display, use the function | |
2546 x-close-connection. Specify which display with a display name. You | |
2547 cannot close the connection if Emacs still has frames open on that | |
2548 display. | |
2549 | |
2550 x-display-list returns a list indicating which displays Emacs has | |
2551 connections to. Its elements are display names (strings). | |
2552 | |
2553 *** The icon-type frame parameter may now be a file name. | |
2554 Then the contents of that file specify the icon bitmap to use | |
2555 for that frame. | |
2556 | |
2557 *** The title of an Emacs frame, displayed by most window managers, is | |
2558 set from frame-title-format or icon-title-format. These have the same | |
2559 structure as mode-line-format. | |
2560 | |
2561 *** x-display-grayscale-p is a new function that returns non-nil if | |
2562 your X server can display shades of gray. Currently it returns | |
2563 non-nil for color displays (because they can display shades of gray); | |
2564 we may change it in the next version to return nil for color displays. | |
2565 | |
2566 *** The frame parameter scroll-bar-width specifies the width of the | |
2567 scrollbar in pixels. | |
2568 | |
2569 ** Buffers | |
2570 | |
2571 *** Creating a buffer with get-buffer-create does not obey | |
2572 default-major-mode. That variable is now handled in a separate | |
2573 function, set-buffer-major-mode. get-buffer-create and generate-new-buffer | |
2574 always leave the newly created buffer in Fundamental mode. | |
2575 | |
2576 Creating a new buffer by visiting a file or with switch-to-buffer, | |
2577 pop-to-buffer, and similar functions does call set-buffer-major-mode | |
2578 to select the default major mode specified with default-major-mode. | |
2579 | |
2580 *** You can now create an "indirect buffer". An indirect buffer shares | |
2581 its text, including text properties, with another buffer (the "base | |
2582 buffer"), but has its own major mode, local variables, overlays, and | |
2583 narrowing. An indirect buffer has a name of its own, distinct from | |
2584 those of the base buffer and all other buffers. An indirect buffer | |
2585 cannot itself be visiting a file (though its base buffer can be). | |
2586 The base buffer cannot itself be indirect. | |
2587 | |
2588 Use (make-indirect-buffer BASE-BUFFER NAME) to make an indirect buffer | |
2589 named NAME whose base is BASE-BUFFER. If BASE-BUFFER is an indirect | |
2590 buffer, its base buffer is used as the base for the new buffer. | |
2591 | |
2592 You can make an indirect buffer current, or switch to it in a window, | |
2593 just as you would a non-indirect buffer. | |
2594 | |
2595 The function buffer-base-buffer, given an indirect buffer, returns its | |
2596 base buffer. It returns nil when given an ordinary buffer (not | |
2597 indirect). | |
2598 | |
2599 The library `noutline' has versions of Outline mode and Outline minor | |
2600 mode which let you display different parts of the outline in different | |
2601 indirect buffers. | |
2602 | |
2603 ** Subprocesses | |
2604 | |
2605 *** The functions call-process and call-process-region now allow | |
2606 you to direct error message output from the subprocess into a | |
2607 separate destination, instead of mixing it with ordinary output. | |
2608 To do this, specify for the third argument, BUFFER, a list of the form | |
2609 (BUFFER-OR-NAME ERROR-DESTINATION) | |
2610 BUFFER-OR-NAME specifies where to put ordinary output; it should | |
2611 be a buffer or buffer name, or t, nil or 0. This is what would | |
2612 have been the BUFFER argument, ordinarily. | |
2613 | |
2614 ERROR-DESTINATION specifies where to put the error output. | |
2615 nil means discard it, t means mix it with the ordinary output, | |
2616 and a string specifies a file name to write this output into. | |
2617 | |
2618 You can't specify a buffer to put the error output in; that is not | |
2619 easy to implement directly. You can put the error output into a | |
2620 buffer by sending it to a temporary file and then inserting the file | |
2621 into a buffer. | |
2622 | |
2623 *** Comint mode changes: | |
2624 | |
2625 **** The variable comint-completion-addsuffix can also be a cons pair | |
2626 of the form (DIRSUFFIX . FILESUFFIX), where DIRSUFFIX and FILESUFFIX are | |
2627 strings added on unambiguous or exact completion of directories and file | |
2628 names, respectively. | |
2629 | |
2630 ** Text properties | |
2631 | |
2632 *** You can now specify which values of the `invisible' property | |
2633 make text invisible in a given buffer. The variable | |
2634 `buffer-invisibility-spec', which is always local in all buffers, | |
2635 controls this. | |
2636 | |
2637 If its value is t, then any non-nil `invisible' property makes | |
2638 a character invisible. | |
2639 | |
2640 If its value is a list, then a character is invisible if its | |
2641 `invisible' property value appears as a member of the list, or if it | |
2642 appears as the car of a member of the list. | |
2643 | |
2644 When the `invisible' property value appears as the car of a member of | |
2645 the `buffer-invisibility-spec' list, then the cdr of that member has | |
2646 an effect. If it is non-nil, then an ellipsis appears in place of the | |
2647 character. (This happens only for the *last* invisible character in a | |
2648 series of consecutive invisible characters, and only at the end of a | |
2649 line.) | |
2650 | |
2651 If a character's `invisible' property is a list, then Emacs checks each | |
2652 element of the list against `buffer-invisibility-spec'. If any element | |
2653 matches, the character is invisible. | |
2654 | |
2655 *** The command `list-text-properties-at' shows what text properties | |
2656 are in effect at point. | |
2657 | |
2658 *** Frame objects now exist in Emacs even on systems that don't support | |
2659 X Windows. You can create multiple frames, and switch between them | |
2660 using select-frame. The selected frame is actually displayed on your | |
2661 terminal; other frames are not displayed at all. The selected frame | |
2662 number appears in the mode line after `Emacs', except for frame 1. | |
2663 | |
2664 Switching frames on ASCII terminals is therefore more or less | |
2665 equivalent to switching between different window configurations. | |
2666 | |
2667 *** The new variable window-size-change-functions holds a list of | |
2668 functions to be called if window sizes change (or if windows are | |
2669 created or deleted). The functions are called once for each frame on | |
2670 which changes have occurred, with the frame as the sole argument. | |
2671 This takes place shortly before redisplay. | |
2672 | |
2673 *** The modification hook functions of overlays now work differently. | |
2674 They are called both before and after each change. This makes it | |
2675 possible for the functions to determine exactly what the change was. | |
2676 | |
2677 This change affects three overlay properties: the modification-hooks | |
2678 property, a list of functions called for deletions overlapping the | |
2679 overlay's range and for insertions inside it; the | |
2680 insert-in-front-hooks, a list of functions called for insertions at | |
2681 the beginning of the overlay; and the insert-behind-hooks, a list of | |
2682 functions called for insertions at the end of the overlay. | |
2683 | |
2684 Each function is called both before and after each change that it | |
2685 applies to. Before the change, it is called with four arguments: | |
2686 (funcall FUNCTION OVERLAY nil START END) | |
2687 START and END are the same arguments that the before-change-functions | |
2688 receive. | |
2689 | |
2690 After the change, each function is called with five arguments: | |
2691 (funcall FUNCTION OVERLAY t START END OLDSIZE) | |
2692 The last arguments, START and END and OLDSIZE, | |
2693 are the same arguments that the after-change-functions receive. | |
2694 | |
2695 This means the function must accept either four or five arguments. | |
2696 | |
2697 *** You can set defaults for text-properties with the new variable | |
2698 `default-text-properties'. Its value is a property list; the values | |
2699 specified there are used whenever a character (or its category) does | |
2700 not specify a value. | |
2701 | |
2702 *** The `face' property of a character or an overlay can now be a list | |
2703 of face names. Formerly it had to be just one face name. | |
2704 | |
2705 *** Changes in handling the `intangible' text property. | |
2706 | |
2707 **** If inhibit-point-motion-hooks is non-nil, then `intangible' properties | |
2708 are ignored. | |
2709 | |
2710 **** Moving to just before a stretch of intangible text | |
2711 is no longer special in any way. Point stays at that place. | |
2712 | |
2713 **** When you move point backwards into the midst of intangible text, | |
2714 point moves back to the beginning of that text. (It used to move | |
2715 forward to the end of that text, which was not very useful.) | |
2716 | |
2717 **** When moving across intangible text, Emacs stops wherever the | |
2718 property value changes. So if you have two stretches of intangible | |
2719 text, with different non-nil intangible properties, it is possible to | |
2720 place point between them. | |
2721 | |
2722 ** Overlays | |
2723 | |
2724 *** Overlay changes. | |
2725 | |
2726 **** The new function previous-overlay-change returns the position of | |
2727 the previous overlay start or end, before a specified position. This | |
2728 is the backwards-moving counterpart of next-overlay-change. | |
2729 | |
2730 **** overlay-get now supports category properties on an overlay | |
2731 the same way get-text-property supports them as text properties. | |
2732 | |
2733 Specifically, if an overlay does not have the property PROP that you | |
2734 ask for, but it does have a `category' property which is a symbol, | |
2735 then that symbol's PROP property is used. | |
2736 | |
2737 **** If an overlay has a non-nil `evaporate' property, it will be | |
2738 deleted if it ever becomes empty (i.e., when it spans no characters). | |
2739 | |
2740 **** If an overlay has a `before-string' and/or `after-string' property, | |
2741 these strings are displayed at the overlay's endpoints. | |
2742 | |
2743 ** Filling | |
2744 | |
2745 *** The new variable fill-paragraph-function provides a way for major | |
2746 modes to override the filling of paragraphs. If this is non-nil, | |
2747 fill-paragraph calls it as a function, passing along its sole | |
2748 argument. If the function returns non-nil, fill-paragraph assumes it | |
2749 has done the job and simply passes on whatever value it returned. | |
2750 | |
2751 The usual use of this feature is to fill comments in programming | |
2752 language modes. | |
2753 | |
2754 *** Text filling and justification changes: | |
2755 | |
2756 **** The new variable use-hard-newlines can be used to make a | |
2757 distinction between "hard" and "soft" newlines; the fill functions | |
2758 will then never remove a newline that was manually inserted. Hard | |
2759 newlines are marked with a non-nil `hard' text-property. | |
2760 | |
2761 **** The fill-column and left-margin can now be modified by text-properties. | |
2762 Most lisp programs should use the new functions (current-fill-column) and | |
2763 (current-left-margin), which return the proper values to use for the | |
2764 current line. | |
2765 | |
2766 **** There are new functions for dealing with margins: | |
2767 | |
2768 ***** Set-left-margin and set-right-margin (set the value for a region | |
2769 and re-fill). These functions take three arguments: two to specify | |
2770 a region, and the desired margin value. | |
2771 | |
2772 ***** Increase-left-margin, decrease-left-margin, increase-right-margin, and | |
2773 decrease-right-margin (change settings relative to current values, and | |
2774 re-fill). | |
2775 | |
2776 ***** move-to-left-margin moves point there, optionally adding | |
2777 indentation or changing tabs to spaces in order to make that possible. | |
2778 beginning-of-line-text also moves past the fill-prefix and any | |
2779 indentation added to center or right-justify a line, to the beginning | |
2780 of the text that the user actually typed. | |
2781 | |
2782 ***** delete-to-left-margin removes any left-margin indentation, but | |
2783 does not change the property. | |
2784 | |
2785 **** The paragraph-movement functions look for the paragraph-start and | |
2786 paragraph-separate regexps at the current left margin, not at the | |
2787 beginning of the line. This means that those regexps should NOT use ^ | |
2788 to anchor the search. However, for backwards compatibility, a ^ at | |
2789 the beginning of the regexp will be ignored, so most packages won't break. | |
2790 | |
2791 **** justify-current-line is now capable of doing left, center, or | |
2792 right justification as well as full justification. | |
2793 | |
2794 **** The fill functions can do any kind of justification based on the new | |
2795 `justification' text-property and `default-justification' variable, | |
2796 or arguments to the functions. They also have a new option which | |
2797 defeats the normal removal of extra whitespace. | |
2798 | |
2799 **** The new function `current-justification' returns the kind of | |
2800 justification used for the current line. The new function | |
2801 `set-justification' can be used to change it, including re-justifying | |
2802 the text of the region according to the new value. | |
2803 | |
2804 **** Filling and auto-fill are disabled if justification is `none'. | |
2805 | |
2806 **** The auto-fill-function is now called regardless of whether | |
2807 the fill-column has been exceeded; the function can determine on its | |
2808 own whether filling (or justification) is necessary. | |
2809 | |
2810 ** Processes | |
2811 | |
2812 *** process-tty-name is a new function that returns the name of the | |
2813 terminal that the process itself reads and writes on (not the name of | |
2814 the pty that Emacs uses to talk with that terminal). | |
2815 | |
2816 *** Errors in process filters and sentinels are now normally caught | |
2817 automatically, so that they don't abort other Lisp programs. | |
2818 | |
2819 Setting debug-on-error non-nil turns off this feature; then errors in | |
2820 filters and sentinels are not caught. As a result, they can invoke | |
2821 the debugger, under the control of debug-on-error. | |
2822 | |
2823 *** Emacs now preserves the match data around the execution of process | |
2824 filters and sentinels. You can use search and match functions freely | |
2825 in filters and sentinels without explicitly bothering to save the | |
2826 match data. | |
2827 | |
2828 ** Display | |
2829 | |
2830 *** The variable message-log-max controls how messages are logged in the | |
2831 "*Messages*" buffer. An integer value means to keep that many lines; | |
2832 t means to log with no limit; nil means disable message logging. Lisp | |
2833 code that calls `message' excessively (e.g. isearch.el) should probably | |
2834 bind this variable to nil. | |
2835 | |
2836 *** Display tables now have a new element, at index 261, specifying the | |
2837 glyph to use for the separator between two side-by-side windows. By | |
2838 default, this is the vertical bar character `|'. Probably the only | |
2839 other useful character to store for this element is a space, to make | |
2840 less visual separation between two side-by-side windows displaying | |
2841 related information. | |
2842 | |
2843 *** The new mode-line-format spec %c displays the current column number. | |
2844 | |
2845 *** The new variable blink-matching-delay specifies how long to keep | |
2846 the cursor at the matching open-paren, after you insert a close-paren. | |
2847 This is useful mainly on systems which can wait for a fraction of a | |
2848 second--you can then specify fractional values such as 0.5. | |
2849 | |
2850 *** Faster processing of buffers with long lines | |
2851 | |
2852 The new variable cache-long-line-scans determines whether Emacs | |
2853 should use caches to handle long lines more quickly. This variable is | |
2854 buffer-local, in all buffers. | |
2855 | |
2856 Normally, the line-motion functions work by scanning the buffer for | |
2857 newlines. Columnar operations (like `move-to-column' and | |
2858 `compute-motion') also work by scanning the buffer, summing character | |
2859 widths as they go. This works well for ordinary text, but if the | |
2860 buffer's lines are very long (say, more than 500 characters), these | |
2861 motion functions will take longer to execute. Emacs may also take | |
2862 longer to update the display. | |
2863 | |
2864 If cache-long-line-scans is non-nil, these motion functions cache | |
2865 the results of their scans, and consult the cache to avoid rescanning | |
2866 regions of the buffer until the text is modified. The caches are most | |
2867 beneficial when they prevent the most searching---that is, when the | |
2868 buffer contains long lines and large regions of characters with the | |
2869 same, fixed screen width. | |
2870 | |
2871 When cache-long-line-scans is non-nil, processing short lines will | |
2872 become slightly slower (because of the overhead of consulting the | |
2873 cache), and the caches will use memory roughly proportional to the | |
2874 number of newlines and characters whose screen width varies. | |
2875 | |
2876 The caches require no explicit maintenance; their accuracy is | |
2877 maintained internally by the Emacs primitives. Enabling or disabling | |
2878 the cache should not affect the behavior of any of the motion functions; | |
2879 it should only affect their performance. | |
2880 | |
2881 ** System Interface | |
2882 | |
2883 *** The function user-login-name now accepts an optional | |
2884 argument uid. If the argument is non-nil, user-login-name | |
2885 returns the login name for that user id. | |
2886 | |
2887 *** system-name, user-name, user-full-name and user-real-name are now | |
2888 variables as well as functions. The variables hold the same values | |
2889 that the functions would return. The new variable multiple-frames | |
2890 is non-nil if at least two non-minibuffer frames are visible. These | |
2891 variables may be useful in constructing the value of frame-title-format | |
2892 or icon-title-format. | |
2893 | |
2894 *** Changes in time-conversion functions. | |
2895 | |
2896 **** The new function format-time-string takes a format string and a | |
2897 time value. It converts the time to a string, according to the format | |
2898 specified. You can specify what kind of conversion to use with | |
2899 %-specifications. | |
2900 | |
2901 **** The new function decode-time converts a time value into a list of | |
2902 specific items of information: the year, month, day of week, day of | |
2903 month, hour, minute and second. (A time value is a list of two or | |
2904 three integers.) | |
2905 | |
2906 **** The new function encode-time converts specific items of time | |
2907 information--the second, minute, hour, day, month, year, and time | |
2908 zone--into a time value. | |
2909 | |
2910 * Changes in Emacs 19.27 | |
2911 | |
2912 There are no changes; however, here is one bug fix made in 19.26 that users | |
2913 think should be documented here. | |
2914 | |
2915 ** SPC and DEL in Info now handle menus consistently. | |
2916 | |
2917 SPC and DEL scroll through an entire subtree an Info manual. Once you | |
2918 scroll through a node far enough to reach a menu, SPC begins moving | |
2919 into the subnodes of the menu, starting with the first one. When you | |
2920 reach the end of a subnode, SPC moves into the next subnode, and so | |
2921 on. | |
2922 | |
2923 DEL more or less scrolls through the same text in reverse order. | |
2924 | |
2925 * User Editing Changes in Emacs 19.26 | |
2926 | |
2927 ** In the X toolkit version, if you click on a menu bar item and | |
2928 release the button quickly outside the menu, the menu remains visible | |
2929 until you click or type something else. If you click on the menu, you | |
2930 select from the menu. Any other mouse click makes the menu disappear. | |
2931 Keyboard input gets rid of the menu and then is processed normally. | |
2932 | |
2933 "Quickly" means within double-click-time milliseconds. | |
2934 | |
2935 ** The C-x 5 commands to select a buffer in "another frame" now use an | |
2936 existing iconified frame, if any, deiconifying it. They also raise | |
2937 the frame. | |
2938 | |
2939 ** Region highlighting on a black-and-white-only display now uses | |
2940 underlining. Inverse-video had the problem that you couldn't see | |
2941 the cursor. | |
2942 | |
2943 ** You can now change the height of a window by pressing mouse-1 on | |
2944 the mode line and dragging it up and down. | |
2945 | |
2946 ** If you set the environment variable LC_CTYPE to iso_8859_1 or | |
2947 iso-8859-1, Emacs automatically sets up for display and syntactic | |
2948 handling of the ISO Latin-1 character set. | |
2949 | |
2950 This does not automatically load any of the packages for input of | |
2951 these characters, because it's not yet clear what is right to do. | |
2952 You must still explicitly load either iso-transl or iso-acc. | |
2953 | |
2954 ** For a read-only buffer that is also modified, the mode line now displays | |
2955 %* instead of %%. | |
2956 | |
2957 ** M-prior (scroll-other-window-down) is a new command that works like | |
2958 M-next (and C-M-v) but scrolls in the opposite direction. | |
2959 | |
2960 M-home moves to the beginning of the buffer, in the other window. | |
2961 M-end moves to the end of the buffer, in the other window. These two | |
2962 commands, along with M-next and M-prior, form a series of commands for | |
2963 moving around in the other window. | |
2964 | |
2965 ** In change logs, the mail address is now delimited with <...> instead | |
2966 of (...). | |
2967 | |
2968 This makes it a little more convenient to extract the mail address for | |
2969 use in mailing a message. | |
2970 | |
2971 ** In Shell mode and other comint modes, C-a has now returned to | |
2972 its ordinary meaning: move to the beginning of the line. | |
2973 Use C-c C-a to move to the end of the prompt. | |
2974 | |
2975 ** If you set mail-signature to t to cause automatic insertion of | |
2976 your .signature file, you now get a -- before the signature. | |
2977 | |
2978 ** Setting rmail-highlighted-headers to nil entirely turns off | |
2979 highlighting in Rmail. However, if your motivation for doing this is | |
2980 that the highlighted text doesn't look good on your display, it might | |
2981 be better to change the appearance of the `highlight' face. Once | |
2982 you've done that, you may find Rmail highlighting is useful. | |
2983 | |
2984 ** In the calendar, mouse-2 is now used only for commands that apply to a date. | |
2985 If you click it when not on a date, it gives an immediate error. | |
2986 | |
2987 Mouse-3 in the calendar now gives a menu of commands that do not apply | |
2988 to a particular date. | |
2989 | |
2990 The D command displays diary entries from a specified diary file (not | |
2991 your standard diary file). | |
2992 | |
2993 ** In the gnus-uu package, the binding for gnus-uu-threaded-decode-and-view | |
2994 is now C-c C-v C-d, not C-c C-v C-h. Thus, C-c C-v C-h is now available | |
2995 for asking for a list of the subcommands of C-c C-v. | |
2996 | |
2997 ** You can now specify "who you are" for various Emacs packages by | |
2998 setting just one variable, user-mail-address. This currently applies | |
2999 to posting news with GNUS and to making change log entries. It may | |
3000 apply to additional Emacs features in the future. | |
3001 | |
3002 * Lisp-Level Changes in Emacs 19.26: | |
3003 | |
3004 ** The function insert-char now takes an optional third argument | |
3005 which, if non-nil, says the inserted characters should inherit sticky | |
3006 text properties from the surrounding text. | |
3007 | |
3008 ** The `diary' library has been renamed to `diary-lib'. If you refer | |
3009 to this library in your Lisp code, you must update the references. | |
3010 | |
3011 ** Sending text to a subprocess can read input from subprocesses if it | |
3012 has to wait because the destination subprocess's terminal input buffer | |
3013 is full. | |
3014 | |
3015 It was already possible in unusual occasions for this operation to | |
3016 read subprocess input, but it did not happen very often. It is now | |
3017 more likely to happen. | |
3018 | |
3019 ** last-nonmenu-event is now bound to t around filter functions and sentinels. | |
3020 This is to ensure that y-or-n-p and yes-or-no-p use the keyboard by default. | |
3021 | |
3022 ** In mode lines, %+ now displays as % for unmodified read-only | |
3023 buffers. It is now the same as %* except in the case of a modified | |
3024 read-only buffer; in that case, %+ displays as *. | |
3025 | |
3026 The old meaning of %+ is now available on %&. | |
3027 It displays * for a modified buffer and - for an unmodified buffer, | |
3028 regardless of read-only status. | |
3029 | |
3030 ** You can now use `underline' in the color list of a face. | |
3031 It serves as a last resort, and says to underline the face | |
3032 (if previous color list elements can't be used). | |
3033 | |
3034 ** The new function x-color-values returns the list of color values | |
3035 for a given color name (a string). The list contains three integers | |
3036 which give the amounts of red, green and blue in the color: (R G B). | |
3037 | |
3038 ** In run-at-time, 0 as the repeat interval means "don't repeat". | |
3039 | |
3040 ** The variable trim-versions-without-asking has been renamed to | |
3041 delete-old-versions. | |
3042 | |
3043 ** The new function other-window-for-scrolling returns the choice of | |
3044 other window for C-M-v to scroll. | |
3045 | |
3046 ** Note that the function fceiling was mistakenly documented as fceil before. | |
3047 | |
3048 * Changes in cc-mode.el in Emacs 19.26: | |
3049 | |
3050 ** A new syntactic symbol has been added: substatement-open. It | |
3051 defines the open brace of a substatement block. These used to get: | |
3052 ((block-open ...) (substatement . ...)). | |
3053 | |
3054 Non-block substatement lines still get just ((substatement . ...)) | |
3055 | |
3056 Note that the custom indent function c-adaptive-block-open has been | |
3057 removed as obsolete. | |
3058 | |
3059 ** You can now specify the `hanginess' of closing braces. See | |
3060 c-hanging-braces-alist. | |
3061 | |
3062 ** Recognizes try and catch blocks in C++. They are given the | |
3063 substatement syntactic symbol. | |
3064 | |
3065 ** should be generally more forgiving about non-GNU standard top-level | |
3066 construct definition styles (i.e. where the function/class/struct | |
3067 opening brace does not start in column zero). | |
3068 | |
3069 If you hang the braces that open a top-level construct on the right | |
3070 edge, and you find you still need to define defun-open-prompt (Emacs | |
3071 19) please let me know. Note that there may still be performance | |
3072 issues related to non-column zero opening braces. | |
3073 | |
3074 ** c-macro-expand is put on C-c C-e | |
3075 | |
3076 ** New style: "Default". Resets indentation to those shipped with | |
3077 cc-mode.el. | |
3078 | |
3079 ** internal defun c-indent-via-language-element has been renamed | |
3080 c-indent-line for compatibility with c-mode.el and awk-mode. | |
3081 | |
3082 ** new buffer-local variable c-comment-start-regexp for (potential) | |
3083 flexibility in adding new modes based on cc-mode.el | |
3084 | |
3085 * Changes in Emacs 19.25 | |
3086 | |
3087 The variable x-cross-pointer-shape (which didn't really exist) has | |
3088 been renamed to x-sensitive-text-pointer-shape, and now does exist. | |
3089 | |
3090 * Changes in Emacs 19.24 | |
3091 | |
3092 Here is a list of new Lisp packages introduced since 19.22. | |
3093 | |
3094 derived.el Define new major modes based on old ones. | |
3095 dired-x.el Extra Dired features. | |
3096 double.el New mode for conveniently inputting non-beyond chars. | |
3097 easymenu.el Create menus easily. | |
3098 ediff.el Snazzy diff interface. | |
3099 foldout.el A kind of outline mode designed for editing programs. | |
3100 gnus-uu.el UUdecode in GNUS buffers. | |
3101 ielm.el Interactively evaluate Lisp. | |
3102 This is a replacement for Lisp Interaction Mode. | |
3103 iso-cvt.el Conversion of beyond-ASCII characters between | |
3104 various different representations. | |
3105 jka-compr.el Automatic compression/decompression. | |
3106 mldrag.el Drag modeline to change heights of windows. | |
3107 mail-hist.el Provides history for headers of outgoing mail. | |
3108 rsz-mini.el Automatically resizing minibuffers. | |
3109 s-region.el Set region by holding shift. | |
3110 skeleton.el Templates for statement insertion. | |
3111 soundex.el Classifying words by how they sound. | |
3112 tempo.el Template insertion with hotspots. | |
3113 | |
3114 * User Editing Changes in 19.23. | |
3115 | |
3116 ** Emacs 19.23 uses Ispell version 3. | |
3117 | |
3118 Previous Emacs 19 versions used Ispell version 4. That version had | |
3119 improvements in storing the dictionary compactly, but these are not | |
3120 very important nowadays. Meanwhile, in parallel to the work on Ispell | |
3121 4, many useful features were added to Ispell 3. Until a few months | |
3122 ago, the terms on Ispell 3 did not let us use it; but they have now | |
3123 been changed, so now we are using it. We are dropping Ispell 4. | |
3124 | |
3125 ** Emacs 19.23 can run on MS-DOG. See the file MSDOS in the same | |
3126 directory as this file. | |
3127 | |
3128 ** Emacs 19.23 can work with an X toolkit. You must specify toolkit | |
3129 operation when you configure Emacs: use the option | |
3130 --with-x-toolkit=yes. (This option uses code developed by Lucid; | |
3131 thanks to Frederic Pierresteguy for helping to adapt it.) | |
3132 | |
3133 ** Emacs now has dialog boxes; yes/no and y/n questions automatically | |
3134 use them in commands invoked with the mouse. For more information, | |
3135 see below under "Lisp programming changes". | |
3136 | |
3137 ** Menus now display the keyboard equivalents (if any) of the menu | |
3138 commands in parentheses after the menu item. | |
3139 | |
3140 ** Kill commands, used in a read-only buffer, now move point across | |
3141 the text they would otherwise have killed. This way, you can use | |
3142 repeated kill commands to transfer text into the kill ring. | |
3143 | |
3144 ** There is now a global mark ring in addition to the mark ring that is local | |
3145 to each buffer. The global mark ring stores positions in any buffer. Any | |
3146 time the mark is set and the current buffer is different from the last time | |
3147 the mark was set, the new mark is pushed on the global mark ring as well. | |
3148 The new command C-x C-SPC (pop-global-mark) pops the global mark ring and | |
3149 jumps to the last mark pushed, first switching to that buffer. | |
3150 | |
3151 ** Query Replace is now available in the Edit menu. | |
3152 | |
3153 ** ESC no longer simply exits a Query Replace. It now exits the Query | |
3154 Replace and remains pending. Thus, ESC A and M-A are now equivalent | |
3155 in Query Replace. | |
3156 | |
3157 To simply exit a Query Replace, type RET or Period. | |
3158 | |
3159 ** M-mouse-2 now puts point at the end of the yanked secondary selection. | |
3160 | |
3161 ** Mouse-1 in the mode line now simply selects the window above that | |
3162 mode line. Mouse-2 in the mode line selects that window and expands | |
3163 it to fill the frame it is in. | |
3164 | |
3165 ** You can now use mouse-2 in a Dired buffer or Tar mode buffer to find | |
3166 a file you click on, in a compilation buffer to go to a particular | |
3167 error message, and in a *Occur* buffer to go to a particular | |
3168 occurrence. | |
3169 | |
3170 (It was already possible to do likewise in Info and in completion list | |
3171 buffers.) | |
3172 | |
3173 What's more, the sensitive areas of the buffer now highlight when you | |
3174 move the mouse over them. | |
3175 | |
3176 ** In a completion list buffer, the command RET now chooses the completion | |
3177 that is around or next to point. | |
3178 | |
3179 ** If you specify the foreground color for the `mode-line' face, and | |
3180 mode-line-inverse-video is non-nil, then the default background color | |
3181 is the usual foreground color. | |
3182 | |
3183 ** revert-buffer now preserves markers pointing within the unchanged | |
3184 text (if any) at the beginning and end of the file. | |
3185 | |
3186 ** Version control checkin and checkout preserve all markers if the | |
3187 file does not contain any of the magic version header sequences that | |
3188 are updated automatically by RCS and SCCS. If such version headers | |
3189 are present, checkin and checkout preserve a marker unless it comes | |
3190 between two such sequences. (So it's a good idea to put all the | |
3191 header sequences close together.) | |
3192 | |
3193 ** When a large deletion shuts off auto save temporarily in a buffer, | |
3194 you can now turn it on again by saving the buffer with C-x C-s (as was | |
3195 possible in Emacs 18). You can also turn it on again with M-1 M-x | |
3196 auto-save (as has been possible in Emacs 19). | |
3197 | |
3198 ** C-x r d now runs the command delete-rectangle. | |
3199 | |
3200 ** The new command imenu shows you a menu of interesting places in the | |
3201 current buffer and lets you select one; then it moves point there. | |
3202 The definition of interesting places depends on the major mode, but | |
3203 typically this includes function definitions and such. Normally, | |
3204 imenu displays the menu in a buffer; but if you bind it to a mouse | |
3205 event, it shows a mouse popup menu. | |
3206 | |
3207 ** You can make certain chosen buffers, that normally appear in a | |
3208 separate window, appear in special frames of their own. To do this, | |
3209 set special-display-buffer-names to a list of buffer names; any buffer | |
3210 whose name is in that list automatically gets a special frame when it | |
3211 is to be displayed in another window. | |
3212 | |
3213 A good value to try is ("*compilation*" "*grep*" "*TeX Shell*"). | |
3214 | |
3215 More generally, you can set special-display-regexps to a list of regular | |
3216 expressions; then each buffer whose name matches any of those regular | |
3217 expressions gets its own frame. | |
3218 | |
3219 The variable special-display-frame-alist specifies the frame | |
3220 parameters for these frames. It has a default value, so you don't | |
3221 need to set it. | |
3222 | |
3223 ** If you set sentence-end-double-space to nil, the fill commands | |
3224 expect just one space at the end of a sentence. (If you want the | |
3225 sentence commands to accept single spaces, you must modify the regexp | |
3226 sentence-end also.) | |
3227 | |
3228 ** You can suppress the startup echo area message by adding text like | |
3229 this to your .emacs file: | |
3230 | |
3231 (setq inhibit-startup-echo-area-message "YOUR-LOGIN-NAME") | |
3232 | |
3233 Simply setting inhibit-startup-echo-area-message to your login name is | |
3234 not sufficient to inhibit the message; Emacs explicitly checks whether | |
3235 .emacs contains an expression as shown above. Your login name must | |
3236 appear in the expression as a Lisp string constant. | |
3237 | |
3238 This way, you can easily inhibit the message for yourself if you wish, | |
3239 but thoughtless copying of your .emacs file will not inhibit the | |
3240 message for someone else. | |
3241 | |
3242 ** Outline minor mode now uses C-c C-o as a prefix instead of just C-c. | |
3243 | |
3244 ** In Outline mode, hide-subtree is now C-c C-d. (It was C-c C-h; but | |
3245 that is now a conventional way to ask for help about C-c commands.) | |
3246 | |
3247 ** There are two additional commands in Outline mode. | |
3248 M-x hide-sublevels | |
3249 hides all headers except the topmost N levels. | |
3250 M-x hide-other | |
3251 hides everything about the body that point is in | |
3252 plus the headers leading up from there to the top of the tree. | |
3253 | |
3254 ** In iso-transl and iso-insert, the sequences for entering A-ring and | |
3255 the AE ligature are now just A and E (plus the initial C-x 8 or Alt). | |
3256 You used to have to enter AA or AE, after the C-x 8 prefix of course. | |
3257 Likewise for lower case a-ring and ae. | |
3258 | |
3259 ** iso-transl now defines convenient Alt keys as well as the C-x 8 prefix. | |
3260 Instead of prefixing a sequence with C-x 8, you can add Alt to the | |
3261 first character of the sequence. For example, Alt-" a is now a way | |
3262 to enter an a-umlaut. | |
3263 | |
3264 ** CC mode is a greatly improved mode for C and C++. | |
3265 See the following page. | |
3266 | |
3267 ** tcl mode is a new major mode. It provides features for | |
3268 editing, indenting and running tcl programs. | |
3269 | |
3270 ** Compilation minor mode lets you parse error messages in any buffer, | |
3271 not just a normal compilation output buffer. Type M-x | |
3272 compilation-minor-mode to enable the minor mode; then C-c C-c jumps to | |
3273 the source location for the error at point, as in the `*compilation*' | |
3274 buffer. If you use compilation-minor-mode in an Rlogin buffer, it | |
3275 automatically accesses remote source files by ftp. | |
3276 | |
3277 ** Comint and shell mode changes: | |
3278 | |
3279 *** Comint modes (including Shell mode, GUD modes, etc.) now bind | |
3280 C-M-l to the command comint-show-output. This command scrolls the | |
3281 buffer to show the last batch of output from the subprogram. | |
3282 | |
3283 *** Completion in Comint modes now truly operates on the string before | |
3284 point, rather than the word that point is within. | |
3285 | |
3286 *** Comint mode file name completion ignores those files that end with a | |
3287 string in the new variable comint-completion-fignore. This variable's | |
3288 default value is nil. | |
3289 | |
3290 *** Shell mode uses the variable shell-completion-fignore to set | |
3291 comint-completion-fignore. The default value is nil, but some | |
3292 people prefer ("~" "#" "%"). | |
3293 | |
3294 *** The function `comint-watch-for-password-prompt' can be used to | |
3295 suppress echoing when a subprocess asks for a password. To use it, | |
3296 do this: | |
3297 | |
3298 (add-hook 'comint-output-filter-functions | |
3299 'comint-watch-for-password-prompt) | |
3300 | |
3301 *** You can use M-x shell-strip-ctrl-m to strip ^M characters from | |
3302 process output. | |
3303 | |
3304 *** In Shell mode, TAB now completes environment variables, if possible, | |
3305 and expands directory references. | |
3306 | |
3307 *** You can use M-x comint-run to execute any program of your choice in | |
3308 a comint mode. Some programs such as shells, rlogin, and debuggers | |
3309 have their own specialized modes; this command is one way to use | |
3310 comint to run programs for which no such specialized mode exits. (You | |
3311 can also run a shell with M-x shell and run the program of your choice | |
3312 under the shell--but that gives you the specializations of Shell | |
3313 mode.) | |
3314 | |
3315 ** When you run GUD (M-x gdb, M-x dbx, and so on), you can use TAB | |
3316 to do file name completion in the minibuffer. | |
3317 | |
3318 The "Complete" menu includes an item for directory expansion. | |
3319 | |
3320 ** GUD working with future versions of GDB will permit TAB for | |
3321 GDB-style symbol completion. This will work with GDB 4.13. | |
3322 | |
3323 ** Rmail no longer gets new mail automatically when you visit an Rmail | |
3324 file specified by name--not even if it is your primary Rmail file. To | |
3325 get new mail, type `g'. This feature is an advantage because you now | |
3326 have a choice of whether to get new mail. (This change actually | |
3327 occurred in an earlier version, but wasn't listed here then, since it | |
3328 made the code do what the documentation already said.) | |
3329 | |
3330 ** Rmail now highlights certain fields automatically, when you use X | |
3331 windows. The variable rmail-highlighted-headers controls which | |
3332 fields. | |
3333 | |
3334 ** If you set rmail-summary-window-size to an integer, Rmail uses | |
3335 a window that many lines high for the summary buffer. | |
3336 | |
3337 ** rmail-input-menu is a new command that visits an Rmail file letting | |
3338 you choose which file with a mouse menu. rmail-output-menu is | |
3339 similar; it outputs the current message, using a mouse menu to choose | |
3340 which Rmail file. These commands use the variables | |
3341 rmail-secondary-file-directory and rmail-secondary-file-regexp. | |
3342 | |
3343 ** The mh-e package has been changed substantially. | |
3344 See the file ./MH-E-NEWS for details. | |
3345 | |
3346 ** The calendar and diary have new features. | |
3347 | |
3348 The menu bar for the calendar contains most of the calendar commands, | |
3349 arranged into logical categories. | |
3350 | |
3351 Mouse-2 now performs specific-date-related commands when clicked on a | |
3352 date in the calendar window and common three-month-related commands | |
3353 when clicked elsewhere in the calendar window. | |
3354 | |
3355 You can set up colored/shaded highlighting of holidays, diary entry | |
3356 dates, and today's date, by setting calendar-holiday-marker, | |
3357 diary-entry-marker, and calendar-today-marker to a face instead of a | |
3358 character. Using a special face is now the default if you are using a | |
3359 window system. | |
3360 | |
3361 ** The appt package for displaying appointment reminders has new | |
3362 features. | |
3363 | |
3364 *** The appt alarm window stays for the full duration of | |
3365 appt-display-duration. It no longer disappears when you start typing | |
3366 text. | |
3367 | |
3368 *** You can change the way the appointment window is created/deleted by | |
3369 setting the variables appt-disp-window-function and | |
3370 appt-delete-window-function. | |
3371 | |
3372 For instance, these variables can be set to functions that display | |
3373 appointments in pop-up frames, which are lowered or iconified after | |
3374 appt-display-duration seconds. | |
3375 | |
3376 ** desktop.el can now save a list of buffer-local variables, | |
3377 and saves more global ones. | |
3378 | |
3379 ** Pascal mode has been completely rewritten. It now features | |
3380 completing of function names, variables and type definitions around | |
3381 current point (like M-TAB does with lisp-symbols). There's also an | |
3382 outline mode (M-x pascal-outline) that hides the bodies of all | |
3383 functions you're not working with. | |
3384 | |
3385 ** Edebug has a number of changes: | |
3386 | |
3387 *** Edebug syntax error reporting is improved. | |
3388 | |
3389 *** Top-level forms and defining forms other than defun and defmacro may | |
3390 now be debugged with Edebug. | |
3391 | |
3392 *** Edebug specifications may now contain body, &define, name, arg or | |
3393 arglist, def-body, and def-form, to support definitions. | |
3394 | |
3395 *** edebug-all-defuns is renamed to edebug-all-defs. | |
3396 def-edebug-form-spec is replaced by def-edebug-form whose arguments | |
3397 are unevaluated. The old names are still available for now. | |
3398 | |
3399 *** Frequency counts and coverage data may be displayed for functions being | |
3400 debugged. | |
3401 | |
3402 *** A global break condition is now checked at every stop point. | |
3403 | |
3404 *** The previous condition at a breakpoint may now be edited. | |
3405 | |
3406 *** A new "next" mode stops only after expression evaluation. | |
3407 | |
3408 *** A new command, top-level-nonstop, does not even stop for unwind-protect, | |
3409 as top-level would. | |
3410 | |
3411 * Changes in CC mode in Emacs 19.23. | |
3412 | |
3413 `cc-mode' provides ANSI C, K&R C, and ARM C++ language editing. It | |
3414 represents the merge of c++-mode.el and c-mode.el. cc-mode provides a | |
3415 new, more flexible indentation engine so that indentation | |
3416 customization is more intuitive. There are two steps to calculating | |
3417 indentation: first, CC mode analyzes the line for syntactic content, | |
3418 then based on this content it applies user defined offsets and adds | |
3419 this offset to the indentation of some previous line. | |
3420 | |
3421 The syntactic analysis determines if the line describes a `statement', | |
3422 `substatement', `class-open', `member-init-intro', etc. These are | |
3423 described in detail with C-h v c-offsets-alist. You can change the | |
3424 offsets interactively with C-c C-o (c-set-offsets), or | |
3425 programmatically in your c-mode-common-hook, which is run both by | |
3426 c-mode and c++-mode. You can also set up "styles" in the same way | |
3427 that you could with c-mode.el. The variable c-basic-offset controls | |
3428 the basic offset given to a level of indentation. | |
3429 | |
3430 If, for example, you wanted to change this style: | |
3431 | |
3432 int foo (int i) | |
3433 { | |
3434 switch (i) { | |
3435 case 1: | |
3436 printf ("its a foo\n"); | |
3437 break; | |
3438 default: | |
3439 printf ("don't know what it is\n"); | |
3440 break; | |
3441 } | |
3442 } | |
3443 | |
3444 into this: | |
3445 | |
3446 int foo (int i) | |
3447 { | |
3448 switch (i) { | |
3449 case 1: | |
3450 printf ("its a foo\n"); | |
3451 break; | |
3452 default: | |
3453 printf ("don't know what it is\n"); | |
3454 break; | |
3455 } | |
3456 } | |
3457 | |
3458 you could add the following to your .emacs file: | |
3459 | |
3460 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook () | |
3461 (c-set-offset 'case-label 2) | |
3462 (c-set-offset 'statement-case-intro 2)) | |
3463 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook) | |
3464 | |
3465 ** New variables: | |
3466 | |
3467 c-offsets-alist contains an association list of syntactic symbols and | |
3468 their relative offsets. Do a "C-h v c-offsets-alist" to get a list of | |
3469 all syntactic symbols currently defined, and their meanings. You | |
3470 should not change this variable directly; use the supplied interface | |
3471 commands c-set-offset and c-set-style. | |
3472 | |
3473 c-mode-common-hook is run by both c-mode and c++-mode during their | |
3474 common initializations. You should put any customizations that are | |
3475 the same for both C and C++ into this hook. | |
3476 | |
3477 The variable c-strict-semantics-p is used mainly for debugging. When | |
3478 non-nil, CC mode signals an error if it returns a syntactic symbol | |
3479 that can't be found in c-offsets-alist. | |
3480 | |
3481 If you want CC mode to echo the syntactic analysis for a particular | |
3482 line when you hit the TAB key, set c-echo-semantic-information-p to | |
3483 non-nil. | |
3484 | |
3485 c-basic-offset controls the standard amount of offset for a level of | |
3486 indentation. You can set a syntactic symbol's offset to + or - as a | |
3487 short-hand for positive or negative c-basic-offset. | |
3488 | |
3489 c-comment-only-line-offset lets you control indentation given to lines | |
3490 which contain only a comment, in the case of C++ line style comments, | |
3491 or the introduction to a C block comment. Comment-only lines at | |
3492 column zero can be anchored there independent of the indentation given | |
3493 to other comment-only lines. | |
3494 | |
3495 c-block-comments-indent-p controls the style of C block comment | |
3496 re-indentation. If you put leading stars in front of comment | |
3497 continuation lines, you should set this variable to nil. | |
3498 | |
3499 c-cleanup-list is a list describing certain C and C++ constructs to be | |
3500 "cleaned up" as they are typed, but only when the auto-newline feature | |
3501 is turned on. In C++, make sure this variable contains at least | |
3502 'scope-operator so that double colons will not be separated by a | |
3503 newline. | |
3504 | |
3505 Colons (`:') and braces (`{` and `}') are special in C and C++. For | |
3506 certain constructs, you may like them to hang on the right edge of the | |
3507 code, or you may like them to start a new line of code. You can use | |
3508 the two variables c-hanging-braces-alist and c-hanging-colons-alist | |
3509 to control whether newlines are placed before and/or after colons and | |
3510 braces when certain C and C++ constructs are entered. For example, | |
3511 you can control whether the colon that introduces a C++ member | |
3512 initialization list hangs on the right edge, starts a new line, or has | |
3513 no newlines either before or after it. | |
3514 | |
3515 c-special-indent-hook is run after a line is indented by CC mode. You | |
3516 can perform any custom indentations here. | |
3517 | |
3518 c-delete-function is the function that is called when a single | |
3519 character is deleted with the c-electric-delete command (DEL). | |
3520 | |
3521 c-electric-pound-behavior describes what happens when you enter the | |
3522 `#' that introduces a cpp macro. | |
3523 | |
3524 If c-tab-always-indent is neither t nor nil, then TAB inserts a tab | |
3525 when within strings, comments, and cpp directives, but it reindents | |
3526 the line unconditionally. | |
3527 | |
3528 c-inhibit-startup-warnings-p inhibits warnings about any old | |
3529 version of Emacs you might be running, which could be incompatible | |
3530 with cc-mode. | |
3531 | |
3532 ** There are two new minor-mode features in CC mode: auto-newline and | |
3533 hungry-delete. Auto-newline inserts newlines automatically as you | |
3534 type certain constructs. Hungry-delete consumes all preceding | |
3535 whitespace (spaces, tabs, and newlines) when the delete key is hit. | |
3536 You can toggle auto-newline on and off on a per-buffer basis by | |
3537 hitting C-c C-a. You can toggle hungry-delete on and off by hitting | |
3538 C-c C-d. You can toggle them both on and off together with C-c C-t. | |
3539 | |
3540 ** Slash (`/') and star (`*') are now both electric characters. | |
3541 | |
3542 ** New commands: | |
3543 | |
3544 The new C-c C-o (c-set-offset) command can be used to interactively change | |
3545 the offset for a particular syntactic symbol. | |
3546 | |
3547 The new command C-c : (c-scope-operator) inserts the C++ scope operator in | |
3548 c++-mode only. | |
3549 | |
3550 The new command C-c C-q (c-indent-defun) indents the entire enclosing | |
3551 top-level function or class. | |
3552 | |
3553 The new command C-c C-s (c-show-semantic-information) echos the current | |
3554 syntactic analysis without re-indenting the current line. | |
3555 | |
3556 The new commands M-x c-forward-into-nomenclature and M-x | |
3557 c-backward-into-nomenclature (currently otherwise unbound to a key | |
3558 sequence), make movement easier when using the C++ variable naming | |
3559 convention of VariableNamesWithoutUnderscoresButEachWordCapitalized. | |
3560 | |
3561 ** Command from c-mode.el that have been renamed in cc-mode.el: | |
3562 | |
3563 electric-c-brace => c-electric-brace | |
3564 electric-c-semi => c-electric-semi&comma | |
3565 electric-c-sharp-sign => c-electric-pound | |
3566 mark-c-function => c-mark-function | |
3567 electric-c-terminator => c-electric-colon | |
3568 indent-c-exp => c-indent-exp | |
3569 set-c-style => c-set-style | |
3570 | |
3571 ** Variables from c-mode.el that are obsolete with cc-mode.el: | |
3572 | |
3573 c-indent-level | |
3574 c-brace-imaginary-offset | |
3575 c-brace-offset | |
3576 c-argdecl-indent | |
3577 c-label-offset | |
3578 c-continued-statement-offset | |
3579 c-continued-brace-offset | |
3580 | |
3581 * Lisp programming changes in Emacs 19.23. | |
3582 | |
3583 ** To pop up a dialog box, call x-popup-dialog. | |
3584 It takes two arguments, POSITION and CONTENTS. | |
3585 | |
3586 POSITION specifies which frame to place the dialog box over; | |
3587 the dialog box always goes on the center of the frame. | |
3588 POSITION may be a mouse event, a window, a frame, | |
3589 or t meaning use the frame that the mouse is in. | |
3590 | |
3591 CONTENTS specifies the contents of the dialog box. | |
3592 It looks like a single pane of a popup menu: | |
3593 (TITLE ITEM1 ITEM2 ...), where each ITEM has the form (STRING . VALUE). | |
3594 The return value is VALUE from the chosen item. | |
3595 | |
3596 An ITEM may also be just a string--that makes a nonselectable item. | |
3597 An ITEM may also be nil--that means to put all preceding items | |
3598 on the left of the dialog box and all following items on the right. | |
3599 (By default, approximately half appear on each side.) | |
3600 | |
3601 If your Emacs is not using an X toolkit, then it cannot display a | |
3602 real dialog box; so instead it displays a pop-up menu in the center | |
3603 of the frame. | |
3604 | |
3605 ** y-or-n-p, yes-or-no-p and map-y-or-n-p now use menus or dialog boxes | |
3606 to ask their question(s) if the command that is running was reached by | |
3607 a mouse event. | |
3608 | |
3609 If you want to control which way these functions work, bind the | |
3610 variable last-nonmenu-event around the call. These functions use the | |
3611 keyboard if that variable holds a keyboard event (actually, any | |
3612 non-list); they use the mouse if that variable holds a mouse event | |
3613 (actually, any list). | |
3614 | |
3615 ** The mouse-face property is now implemented, both in overlays and as | |
3616 a text property. It specifies a face to use when the mouse is in the | |
3617 range of text for which the property is specified. | |
3618 | |
3619 ** When text has a non-nil `intangible' property, you cannot move point | |
3620 within it or right before it. If you try, point actually moves to the | |
3621 end of the intangible text. Note that this means that backward-char | |
3622 is a no-op when there is an intangible character to the left of point. | |
3623 | |
3624 ** minibuffer-exit-hook is a new normal hook that is run when you | |
3625 exit the minibuffer. | |
3626 | |
3627 ** The variable x-cross-pointer-shape specifies the cursor shape to use | |
3628 when the mouse is over text that has a mouse-face property. | |
3629 | |
3630 ** The new variable interpreter-mode-alist specifies major modes to use | |
3631 for shell scripts that specify a command interpreter. Its elements | |
3632 look like (INTERPRETER . MODE); for example, ("perl" . perl-mode) is | |
3633 one element present by default. This feature applies only when the | |
3634 file name doesn't indicate which mode to use. | |
3635 | |
3636 ** If you use a minibuffer-only frame, set the variable | |
3637 minibuffer-auto-raise to t, and entering the minibuffer will then | |
3638 raise the minibuffer frame. | |
3639 | |
3640 ** If pop-up-frames is t, display-buffer now looks for an existing | |
3641 window in any visible frame, showing the specified buffer, and uses | |
3642 such a window in preference to making a new frame. | |
3643 | |
3644 ** In the functions next-window, previous-window, next-frame, | |
3645 previous-frame, get-buffer-window, get-lru-window, get-largest-window | |
3646 and delete-windows-on, if you specify `visible' for the last argument, | |
3647 it means to consider all visible frames. | |
3648 | |
3649 ** Mouse events now give the X and Y coordinates in pixels, rather than | |
3650 in characters. You can convert these values to characters by dividing by | |
3651 the values of (frame-char-width) and (frame-char-height). | |
3652 | |
3653 ** The new functions mouse-pixel-position and set-mouse-pixel-position | |
3654 read and set the mouse position in units of pixels. The existing | |
3655 functions mouse-position and set-mouse-position continue to work with | |
3656 units of characters. | |
3657 | |
3658 ** The new function compute-motion is useful for computing the width | |
3659 of certain text when it is displayed. | |
3660 | |
3661 ** The function vertical-motion now takes an option second argument WINDOW | |
3662 which says which window to use for the display calculations. | |
3663 | |
3664 vertical-motion always operates on the current buffer. | |
3665 It is ok to specify a window displaying some other buffer. | |
3666 Then vertical-motion uses the width, hscroll and display-table of | |
3667 the specified window, but still scans the current buffer. | |
3668 | |
3669 ** An error no longer sets last-command to t; the value of last-command | |
3670 does reflect the previous command (the one that got an error). | |
3671 | |
3672 If you do not want a particular command to be recognized as the | |
3673 previous command in the case where it got an error, you must code that | |
3674 command to prevent this. Set this-command to t at the beginning of | |
3675 the command, and set this-command back to its proper value at the end, | |
3676 like this: | |
3677 | |
3678 (defun foo (args...) | |
3679 (interactive ...) | |
3680 (setq this-command t) | |
3681 ...do the work... | |
3682 (setq this-command 'foo)) | |
3683 | |
3684 or like this: | |
3685 | |
3686 (defun foo (args...) | |
3687 (interactive ...) | |
3688 (let ((old-this-command this-command)) | |
3689 (setq this-command t) | |
3690 ...do the work... | |
3691 (setq this-command old-this-command))) | |
3692 | |
3693 The undo and yank commands do this. | |
3694 | |
3695 ** If you specify an explicit title for a new frame when you create it, | |
3696 the title is used as the resource name when looking up X resources to | |
3697 control the shape of that frame. If you don't specify the frame title, | |
3698 the value of x-resource-name is used, as before. | |
3699 | |
3700 ** The frame parameter user-position, if non-nil, says that the user | |
3701 has specified the frame position. Emacs reports this to the window | |
3702 manager, to tell it not to override the position that the user | |
3703 specified. | |
3704 | |
3705 ** Major modes can now set change-major-mode-hook to arrange for state | |
3706 to be cleaned up when the user switches to a new major mode. The function | |
3707 kill-all-local-variables runs this hook. For best results, make the hook a | |
3708 buffer-local variable so that it will disappear after doing its job and will | |
3709 not interfere with the subsequent major mode. | |
3710 | |
3711 ** The new variable overriding-local-map, if non-nil, specifies a keymap | |
3712 that overrides the current local map, all minor mode keymaps, and all | |
3713 text property keymaps. Incremental search uses this feature to override | |
3714 all other keymaps temporarily. | |
3715 | |
3716 ** A key definition in a menu keymap can now have additional structure: | |
3717 in addition to (ITEMNAME [HELPSTRING] . COMMAND) which was allowed | |
3718 before, the form (ITEMNAME [HELPSTRING] (...) . COMMAND) is | |
3719 allowed. (HELPSTRING is optional, and is not currently used.) | |
3720 | |
3721 Here (...) represents a sublist containing information about keyboard | |
3722 key sequences that run the same command COMMAND. Displaying the menu | |
3723 automatically creates and updates the sublist when appropriate; you | |
3724 need never set these up yourself. | |
3725 | |
3726 lookup-key, key-binding, and similar functions return just COMMAND, | |
3727 not the whole binding. | |
3728 | |
3729 To precompute this information for a given keymap, you can do | |
3730 (x-popup-menu nil KEYMAP). | |
3731 | |
3732 ** When you specify coordinates for x-popup-menu as a list ((XOFFSET | |
3733 YOFFSET) WINDOW), the coordinates are now measured in pixels. | |
3734 | |
3735 ** where-is-internal now takes just four arguments: | |
3736 DEFINITION KEYMAP FIRSTONLY NOINDIRECT. | |
3737 The single argument KEYMAP replaces two arguments KEYMAP and KEYMAP1. | |
3738 | |
3739 If KEYMAP is non-nil, where-is-internal searches only KEYMAP and the | |
3740 global keymap. | |
3741 | |
3742 If KEYMAP is nil, where-is-internal searches all the currently active | |
3743 keymaps, but finds the active keymaps as if overriding-local-map were | |
3744 nil. | |
3745 | |
3746 If you pass a list of the form (keymap) as KEYMAP, where-is-internal | |
3747 searches only the global map. (This is not a special case--it follows | |
3748 from the specifications above.) | |
3749 | |
3750 If you pass the value of overriding-local-map as KEYMAP, where-is-internal | |
3751 searches in exactly the same was as command execution does. | |
3752 | |
3753 ** Use the macro define-derived-mode to define a new major mode that | |
3754 inherits the definition of another major mode. Here's how to define a | |
3755 command named hypertext-mode that inherits from the command text-mode: | |
3756 | |
3757 (define-derived-mode hypertext-mode text-mode "Hypertext" | |
3758 "Major mode for hypertext.\n\n\\{hypertext-mode-map}" | |
3759 (setq case-fold-search nil)) | |
3760 | |
3761 (define-key hypertext-mode-map [down-mouse-3] 'do-hyper-link) | |
3762 | |
3763 The new mode has its own keymap, which inherits from that of the | |
3764 original mode. It also has its own syntax and abbrev tables, which | |
3765 are initialized by copying those of the original mode. It also has | |
3766 its own mode hook. All are given names made by appending a suffix | |
3767 to the name of the new mode. | |
3768 | |
3769 ** A syntax table can now inherit the data for some characters from | |
3770 standard-syntax-table, while specifying other characters itself. | |
3771 Syntax code 13 means "inherit this character from the standard syntax | |
3772 table." In modify-syntax-entry, the character `@' represents this code. | |
3773 | |
3774 The function `make-syntax-table' now creates a syntax table which | |
3775 inherits all letters and control characters (0 to 31 and 128 to 255) | |
3776 from the standard syntax table, while copying the other characters | |
3777 from the standard syntax table. Most syntax tables in Emacs are set | |
3778 up this way. | |
3779 | |
3780 This sort of inheritance is useful for people who set up character | |
3781 sets with additional alphabetic characters in the range 128 to 255. | |
3782 Just changing the standard syntax for these characters affects all | |
3783 major modes. | |
3784 | |
3785 ** The new function transpose-regions swaps two regions of the buffer. | |
3786 It preserves the markers in those two regions, so that they stay with | |
3787 the surrounding text as it is swapped. | |
3788 | |
3789 ** revert-buffer now runs before-revert-hook at the beginning and | |
3790 after-revert-hook at the end. These can be used by minor modes | |
3791 that need to clean up state variables. | |
3792 | |
3793 ** The new function get-char-property is like get-text-property, but | |
3794 checks for overlays with properties as well as for text properties. | |
3795 It checks for overlays first, in order of descending priority, and | |
3796 text properties last. | |
3797 | |
3798 get-char-property allows windows as the OBJECT argument, as well | |
3799 as buffers and strings. If you specify a window, then only overlays | |
3800 active on that window are considered. | |
3801 | |
3802 ** Overlays can have the `invisible' property. | |
3803 | |
3804 ** The function insert-file-contents now takes an optional fifth | |
3805 argument called REPLACE. If this is t, it means to replace the | |
3806 contents of the buffer (actually, just the accessible portion) | |
3807 with the contents of the file. | |
3808 | |
3809 This is better than simply deleting and inserting the whole thing | |
3810 because (1) it preserves some marker positions and (2) it puts less | |
3811 data in the undo list. | |
3812 | |
3813 ** The variable inhibit-first-line-modes-regexps specifies classes of | |
3814 file names for which -*- on the first line should not be looked for. | |
3815 | |
3816 ** The variables before-change-functions and after-change-functions | |
3817 hold lists of functions to call before and after a change in the | |
3818 buffer's text. They work much like before-change-function and | |
3819 after-change-function, except that they hold a list of functions | |
3820 instead of just one. | |
3821 | |
3822 These variables will eventually make before-change-function and | |
3823 after-change-function obsolete. | |
3824 | |
3825 ** The variable kill-buffer-query-functions holds a list of functions | |
3826 to be called with no arguments when a buffer is about to be killed. | |
3827 (That buffer is the current buffer when the function is called.) | |
3828 If any of the functions returns nil, the buffer is not killed | |
3829 (and the remaining functions in the list are not called). | |
3830 | |
3831 ** The variable kill-emacs-query-functions holds a list of functions | |
3832 to be called with no arguments when you ask to exit Emacs. | |
3833 If any of the functions returns nil, the exit is canceled | |
3834 (and the remaining functions in the list are not called). | |
3835 | |
3836 ** The argument for buffer-disable-undo is now optional, | |
3837 like the argument for buffer-enable-undo. | |
3838 | |
3839 ** The new variable system-configuration holds the canonical three-part | |
3840 GNU configuration name for which Emacs was built. | |
3841 | |
3842 ** The function system-name now tries harder to return a fully qualified | |
3843 domain name. | |
3844 | |
3845 ** The variable emacs-major-version holds the major version number | |
3846 of Emacs. (Currently 19.) | |
3847 | |
3848 ** The variable emacs-minor-version holds the minor version number | |
3849 of Emacs. (Currently 23.) | |
3850 | |
3851 ** The default value of comint-input-autoexpand is now nil. | |
3852 However, Shell mode sets it from the value of shell-input-autoexpand, | |
3853 whose default value is `history'. | |
3854 | |
3855 ** The new function set-process-window-size specifies the terminal window | |
3856 size for a subprocess. On some systems it sends the subprocess a signal | |
3857 to let it know that the size has changed. | |
3858 | |
3859 ** %P is a new way to display a percentage in the mode line. It | |
3860 displays the percentage of the buffer text that is above the *bottom* | |
3861 of the window (which includes the text visible, in the window as well | |
3862 as the text above the top). It displays `Top' as well as the | |
3863 percentage if the top of the buffer is visible on screen. | |
3864 | |
3865 ** %+ in the mode line specs displays `*' if the buffer is modified, | |
3866 and otherwise `-'. It never displays `%', as `%*' would do; whether the | |
3867 buffer is read-only has no effect on %+. | |
3868 | |
3869 ** The new functions ffloor, fceiling, fround and ftruncate take a | |
3870 floating point argument and return a floating point result whose value | |
3871 is a nearby integer. ffloor returns the nearest integer below; fceiling, | |
3872 the nearest integer above; ftruncate, the nearest integer in the | |
3873 direction towards zero; fround, the nearest integer. | |
3874 | |
3875 ** Setting `print-escape-newlines' to a non-nil value now also makes | |
3876 formfeeds print as ``\f''. | |
3877 | |
3878 ** auto-mode-alist now has a new feature. If an element has the form | |
3879 (REGEXP FUNCTION t), and REGEXP matches the file name, then after calling | |
3880 FUNCTION, Emacs deletes the part of the file name that matched REGEXP | |
3881 and then searches auto-mode-alist again for a new match. | |
3882 | |
3883 This is useful for uncompression packages. An entry of this sort for | |
3884 .gz can uncompress the file and then put the uncompressed file in the | |
3885 proper mode according to the name sans .gz. | |
3886 | |
3887 ** The new function emacs-pid returns the process ID number of Emacs. | |
3888 | |
3889 ** user-login-name now consistently checks the LOGNAME environment | |
3890 variable before USER. user-original-login-name is obsolete, since it | |
3891 provides the same functionality. To ignore the environment variables, | |
3892 use user-real-login-name. | |
3893 | |
3894 ** There is a more general way of handling the system-specific X | |
3895 keysyms. Set the variable system-key-alist to an alist containing | |
3896 elements of the form (CODE . SYMBOL), where CODE is the numeric keysym | |
3897 code minus the "vendor specific" bit, and symbol is the name for the | |
3898 function key. | |
3899 | |
3900 ** You can use the variable command-line-functions to set up functions | |
3901 to process unrecognized command line arguments. The variable's value | |
3902 should be a list of functions of no arguments. The functions are | |
3903 called successively until one of them returns non-nil. | |
3904 | |
3905 Each function should access the free variables argi (the current | |
3906 argument) and command-line-args-left (the remaining arguments). The | |
3907 function should return non-nil only if it recognizes and processes the | |
3908 argument in argi. If it does so, it may consume following arguments | |
3909 as well by removing them from command-line-args-left. | |
3910 | |
3911 ** There's a new way for a magic file name handler to run a primitive | |
3912 and inhibit handling of the file name. Here is how to do it: | |
3913 | |
3914 (let ((inhibit-file-name-handlers | |
3915 (cons 'ange-ftp-file-handler | |
3916 (and (eq inhibit-file-name-operation operation) | |
3917 inhibit-file-name-handlers))) | |
3918 (inhibit-file-name-operation operation)) | |
3919 (apply this-operation args)) | |
3920 | |
3921 The function find-file-name-handler now takes two arguments. The | |
3922 second argument is OPERATION, the operation for which the handler is | |
3923 being sought. | |
3924 | |
3925 People have suggested that the second argument should be optional, for | |
3926 backward compatibility. It would be nice if that were possible, but | |
3927 it is not. There is simply no way for find-file-name-handler to do | |
3928 the right thing without receiving the proper value for its second | |
3929 argument. | |
3930 | |
3931 ** The variable completion-regexp-list affects the completion | |
3932 primitives try-completion and all-completions. They consider | |
3933 only the possible completions that match each regexp in the list. | |
3934 | |
3935 ** Case conversion in the function replace-match has been changed. | |
3936 | |
3937 The old behavior was this: if any word in the old text was | |
3938 capitalized, replace-match capitalized each word of the replacement | |
3939 text. | |
3940 | |
3941 The new behavior is this: if the first word in the old text is capitalized, | |
3942 replace-match capitalizes the first word of the replacement text. | |
3943 | |
3944 ** You can now specify a case table with CANON non-nil and EQV nil. | |
3945 Then the EQV part of the case table is deduced from CANON. | |
3946 | |
3947 ** The new function minibuffer-prompt takes no arguments and returns | |
3948 the current minibuffer prompt string. | |
3949 | |
3950 The new function minibuffer-prompt-width takes no arguments and | |
3951 returns the display width of the minibuffer prompt string. | |
3952 | |
3953 ** The new function frame-first-window returns the window at the | |
3954 upper left corner of a given frame. | |
3955 | |
3956 ** wholenump is a new alias for natnump. | |
3957 | |
3958 ** The variable installation-directory, if non-@code{nil}, names a | |
3959 directory within which to look for the `lib-src' and `etc' | |
3960 subdirectories. This is non-nil when Emacs can't find those | |
3961 directories in their standard installed locations, but can find them | |
3962 near where the Emacs executable was found. | |
3963 | |
3964 ** invocation-name and invocation-directory are now variables as well | |
3965 as functions. The variable values are the same values that the | |
3966 functions return: the Emacs program name sans directories, and the | |
3967 directory it was found in. (invocation-directory may be nil, if Emacs | |
3968 can't determine which directory it should be.) | |
3969 | |
3970 ** Installation change regarding version number counting. | |
3971 | |
3972 The version number of an Emacs executable contains three numbers. | |
3973 The first two describe the Emacs release and the third increments | |
3974 each time you build Emacs. | |
3975 | |
3976 Now the file version.el contains only the first two version numbers. | |
3977 The third component is now determined on the basis of the names of the | |
3978 existing executable files. This means that version.el is not altered | |
3979 by building Emacs. | |
3980 | |
3981 * Changes in 19.22. | |
3982 | |
3983 ** The mouse click M-mouse-2 now inserts the current secondary | |
3984 selection (from Emacs or any other X client) where you click. | |
3985 It does not move point. | |
3986 This command is called mouse-yank-secondary. | |
3987 | |
3988 mouse-kill-secondary no longer has a key binding by default. | |
3989 Clicking M-mouse-3 (mouse-secondary-save-then-kill) twice | |
3990 may be a convenient enough way of killing the secondary selection. | |
3991 Or perhaps there should be a keyboard binding for killing the | |
3992 secondary selection. Any suggestions? | |
3993 | |
3994 ** New packages: | |
3995 | |
3996 *** `icomplete' provides character-by-character information | |
3997 about what you could complete if you type TAB. | |
3998 | |
3999 *** `avoid' moves the mouse away from point so that it doesn't hide | |
4000 your typing. | |
4001 | |
4002 *** `shadowfile' helps you update files that are supposed to be stored | |
4003 identically in different places (perhaps on different machines). | |
4004 | |
4005 ** C-h p now knows about four additional keywords: data, faces, mouse, | |
4006 and matching. | |
4007 | |
4008 ** The key for starting an inferior Lisp process, in Lisp mode, | |
4009 is now C-c C-z instead of C-c C-l. | |
4010 | |
4011 ** When the VC commands ask whether to save the buffer, if you say no, | |
4012 they signal an error. This is so that you won't operate on the wrong | |
4013 data. | |
4014 | |
4015 ** ISO Accents mode now supports `"s' as a way of typing German sharp s. | |
4016 | |
4017 ** By default, comint buffers (including Shell mode and debuggers) | |
4018 no longer try to scroll to keep the cursor on the bottom line. | |
4019 This feature was added in 19.21 but did not work smoothly enough. | |
4020 | |
4021 ** Emacs now handles the window manager "delete window" operation. | |
4022 | |
4023 ** Display of buffers with text properties is much faster now. | |
4024 | |
4025 ** The feature previously announced whereby `insert' does not inherit | |
4026 text properties from surrounding text was not fully implemented | |
4027 before; but now it is. use `insert-and-inherit' if you wish to | |
4028 inherit sticky properties from the surrounding text. | |
4029 | |
4030 ** The functions next-property-change, previous-property-change, | |
4031 next-single-property-change, and previous-single-property-change | |
4032 now take one additional optional argument LIMIT that is a position at | |
4033 which to stop scanning. If scan ends without finding the property | |
4034 change sought, these functions return the specified limit. | |
4035 | |
4036 The value returned by previous-single-property-change and | |
4037 previous-property-change, when they do find a change, is now one | |
4038 greater than what it used to be. It is the position between the two | |
4039 characters whose properties differ, which is one greater than the | |
4040 position of the first character found (while scanning back) with | |
4041 different properties. | |
4042 | |
4043 * User editing changes in version 19.21. | |
4044 | |
4045 ** ISO Accents mode supports four additional characters: | |
4046 A-with-ring (entered as /A), AE ligature (entered as /E), | |
4047 and their lower-case equivalents. | |
4048 | |
4049 * User editing changes in version 19.20. | |
4050 (See following page for Lisp programming changes.) | |
4051 | |
4052 Note that some of these changes were made subsequent to the Emacs 19.20 | |
4053 editions of the Emacs manual and Emacs Lisp manual; therefore, if you | |
4054 have those editions, do read this page. | |
4055 | |
4056 ** Dragging with mouse button 1 now puts the selected region | |
4057 in the kill ring so you can paste it into other X applications. | |
4058 | |
4059 ** Double and triple clicks with button 1 now behave as in xterm, | |
4060 selecting the word or line surrounding where you click. If you drag | |
4061 after the last click, you can select a range of words or lines. | |
4062 | |
4063 ** You can use button 3 to extend a mouse-selected region, as in xterm. | |
4064 This works for regions selected either by dragging Mouse-1 or by | |
4065 multiple-clicking Mouse-1. Clicking Mouse-3 moves the end of the | |
4066 region that is (initially) nearer to where you click. | |
4067 | |
4068 If the selection was first made by multiple-clicking Mouse-1, and thus | |
4069 consists of entire words or lines, Mouse-3 preserves that state. | |
4070 | |
4071 As before, clicking Mouse-3 again in the same place kills the region | |
4072 thus selected. | |
4073 | |
4074 ** The secondary selection commands, M-Mouse-1 and M-Mouse-3, have been | |
4075 likewise modified. | |
4076 | |
4077 ** You can now search for strings and regexps using the Edit menu bar menu. | |
4078 | |
4079 ** You can now access bookmarks using the Bookmark submenu in the File | |
4080 menu in the menu bar. | |
4081 | |
4082 ** ISO Accents mode, a buffer-local minor mode, provides a convenient | |
4083 way to type certain non-ASCII characters. It makes the characters `, | |
4084 ', ", ^, ~ and / serve as modifiers for the following letter. ` and ' | |
4085 add accents, " adds an umlaut or dieresis, ^ adds a circumflex, ~ | |
4086 adds a tilde, and / adds a slash to the following letter. | |
4087 | |
4088 If the following character is not a letter, or cannot be modified as | |
4089 requested, then both characters stand for themselves. If you | |
4090 duplicate the modifier accent character, that enters the corresponding | |
4091 ISO non-spacing accent character (thus, '' enters the ISO acute-accent | |
4092 character). To enter a modifier character itself, type it followed by | |
4093 a space. | |
4094 | |
4095 This feature can be used whenever a key sequence is expected: for | |
4096 ordinary insertion, for searching, and for certain command arguments. | |
4097 | |
4098 A few special combinations: | |
4099 | |
4100 ~c => c with cedilla | |
4101 ~d => d with stroke | |
4102 ~< => left guillemot | |
4103 ~> => right guillemot | |
4104 | |
4105 ** iso-transl.el is a new library that replaces iso-insert.el. | |
4106 It defines C-x 8 as an insertion prefix for the ISO characters | |
4107 between 128 and 255, much like iso-insert, except that iso-transl | |
4108 works even in searches and help commands--wherever a key sequence | |
4109 is expected. | |
4110 | |
4111 To define case-conversion for these characters for ISO 8859/1, | |
4112 load the library iso-syntax. (This is not new.) | |
4113 | |
4114 ** M-TAB in Text mode now runs the command ispell-complete-word | |
4115 which performs completion using the spelling dictionary. | |
4116 | |
4117 The spelling correction submenu now includes this command | |
4118 and another command which completes a word fragment (that is, | |
4119 it doesn't assume that the text to be completed starts at the | |
4120 beginning of a word. | |
4121 | |
4122 ** In incremental search, you can use M-y to yank the most recent kill | |
4123 into the search string. | |
4124 | |
4125 ** The new function ispell-message checks the spelling of a message | |
4126 you are about to send or post. It ignores text cited from other | |
4127 messages. | |
4128 | |
4129 To automatically check all your outgoing messages, include the | |
4130 following line in your .emacs file: | |
4131 (setq news-inews-hook (setq mail-send-hook 'ispell-message)) | |
4132 | |
4133 ** There is now a separate minibuffer history list for the names of | |
4134 extended commands. This history list is used by M-x when reading | |
4135 the command name. The motivation for this is to prevent command | |
4136 names from appearing in the history used for other minibuffer | |
4137 arguments. | |
4138 | |
4139 Note that the history list for entire commands that use the minibuffer | |
4140 is a separate feature. That history list records a command with all | |
4141 its arguments, and you must use C-x ESC ESC to access it. | |
4142 | |
4143 ** You can use the new command C-x v ~ VERSION RET to examine a | |
4144 specified version of a file that is maintained with version control. | |
4145 | |
4146 ** In Indented Text mode, only blank lines now separate paragraphs. | |
4147 Indented lines continue the paragraph that is in progress. This makes | |
4148 the user option variable adaptive-fill-mode have its intended effect. | |
4149 | |
4150 ** Local variable specifications in files for variables whose names end | |
4151 in `-hook' and `-function' are now controlled by the variable | |
4152 `enable-local-eval', just like the `eval' variable. | |
4153 | |
4154 ** C-x r j (jump-to-register) when restoring a frame configuration now | |
4155 makes all unwanted frames (existing frames not mentioned in the | |
4156 configuration) invisible. | |
4157 | |
4158 If you want to delete these unwanted frames, use a prefix argument for | |
4159 C-x r j. | |
4160 | |
4161 ** You can customize the calendar to display weeks beginning on | |
4162 Monday: set the variable `calendar-week-start-day' to 1. | |
4163 | |
4164 ** Rmail changes. | |
4165 | |
4166 If you save messages to a file in Unix format while viewing a message | |
4167 with its whole header, this now copies to the file the entire header | |
4168 of each message copied. | |
4169 | |
4170 ** Comint mode changes. | |
4171 | |
4172 C-c C-e shows as much output as possible in the window. | |
4173 C-c RET copies an old input (the one at point) | |
4174 and places the copy after the latest prompt. | |
4175 C-c C-p and C-c C-n move through the buffer, stopping at places | |
4176 where the subshell prompted for input. | |
4177 C-c C-h lists the input history in a `*Help*' buffer. | |
4178 | |
4179 There are new menu bar items for completion/input/output/signal commands. | |
4180 | |
4181 Input behaviour is configurable. Variables control whether some windows | |
4182 showing the buffer scroll to the bottom before insertion. These are | |
4183 `comint-scroll-to-bottom-on-input' and `before-change-function'. By default, | |
4184 insertion causes the selected window to scroll to the bottom before insertion | |
4185 occurs. | |
4186 | |
4187 Subprocess output now keeps point at the end of the buffer in each | |
4188 window individually if point was already at the end of the buffer in | |
4189 that window. | |
4190 | |
4191 If `comint-scroll-show-maximum-output' is non-nil (which is the | |
4192 default), then scrolling due to arrival of output tries to place the | |
4193 last line of text at the bottom line of the window, so as to show as | |
4194 much useful text as possible. (This mimics the scrolling behavior of | |
4195 many terminals.) | |
4196 | |
4197 By setting `comint-scroll-to-bottom-on-output', you can opt for having | |
4198 point jump to the end of the buffer whenever output arrives--no matter | |
4199 where in the buffer point was before. If the value is `this', point | |
4200 jumps in the selected window. If the value is `all', point jumps in | |
4201 each window that shows the comint buffer. If the value is `other', | |
4202 point jumps in all nonselected windows that show the current buffer. | |
4203 The default value is nil, which means point does not jump to the end. | |
4204 | |
4205 Input history insertion is configurable. A variable controls whether only the | |
4206 first instance of successive identical inputs is stored in the input history. | |
4207 This is `comint-input-ignoredups'. | |
4208 | |
4209 Completion (bound to TAB) is now more general. Depending on context, | |
4210 completion now operates on the input history, on command names, or (as | |
4211 before) on filenames. | |
4212 | |
4213 Filename completion is configurable. Variables control whether | |
4214 file/directory suffix characters are added (`comint-completion-addsuffix'), | |
4215 whether shortest completion is acceptable when no further unambiguous | |
4216 completion is possible (`comint-completion-recexact'), and the timing of | |
4217 completion candidate listing (`comint-completion-autolist'). | |
4218 | |
4219 Comint mode now provides history expansion. Insert input using `!' | |
4220 and `^', in the same syntax that typical shells use; then type TAB. | |
4221 This searches the comint input history for a matching element, | |
4222 performs substitution if necessary, and places the result in the | |
4223 comint buffer in place of the original input. | |
4224 | |
4225 History references in the input may be expanded before insertion into | |
4226 the input ring, or on input to the interpreter (and therefore | |
4227 visibly). The variable `comint-input-autoexpand' specifies which. | |
4228 | |
4229 You can make the SPC key perform history expansion by binding | |
4230 SPC to the command `comint-magic-space'. | |
4231 | |
4232 The command `comint-dynamic-complete-variable' does variable name | |
4233 completion using the environment variables as set within Emacs. The | |
4234 variables controlling filename completion apply to variable name | |
4235 completion too. This command is normally available through the menu | |
4236 bar. | |
4237 | |
4238 ** Shell mode | |
4239 | |
4240 Paragraph motion and marking commands (default bindings M-{, M-}, M-h) operate | |
4241 on output groups (i.e., shell prompt plus associated shell output). | |
4242 | |
4243 TAB now completes commands, as well as file names and expand history. | |
4244 Commands are searched for along the path that Emacs has on startup. | |
4245 | |
4246 C-c C-f now moves forward a command (`shell-forward-command') and | |
4247 C-c C-b now moves backward a command (`shell-backward-command'). | |
4248 | |
4249 Command completion is configurable. The variables controlling | |
4250 filename completion in comint mode apply, together with a variable | |
4251 controlling whether to restrict possible completions to only files | |
4252 that are executable (`shell-command-execonly'). | |
4253 | |
4254 The input history is initialised from the file name given in the | |
4255 variable `shell-input-ring-file-name'--normally `.history' in your | |
4256 home directory. | |
4257 | |
4258 Directory tracking is more robust. It can cope with command sequences | |
4259 and forked commands, and can detect the failure of directory changing | |
4260 commands in most circumstances. It's still not infallible, of course. | |
4261 | |
4262 You can now configure the behaviour of `pushd'. Variables control | |
4263 whether `pushd' behaves like `cd' if no argument is given | |
4264 (`shell-pushd-tohome'), pop rather than rotate with a numeric argument | |
4265 (`shell-pushd-dextract'), and only add directories to the directory | |
4266 stack if they are not already on it (`shell-pushd-dunique'). The | |
4267 configuration you choose should match the underlying shell, of course. | |
4268 | |
4269 * Emacs Lisp programming changes in Emacs 19.20. | |
4270 | |
4271 ** A new function `remove-hook' is now used to remove a hook that you might | |
4272 have added with `add-hook'. | |
4273 | |
4274 ** There is now a Lisp pretty-printer in the library `pp'. | |
4275 | |
4276 ** The partial Common Lisp support has been entirely reimplemented. | |
4277 | |
4278 ** When you insert text using `insert', `insert-before-markers' or | |
4279 `insert-buffer-substring', text properties are no longer inherited | |
4280 from the surrounding text. | |
4281 | |
4282 When you want to inherit text properties, use the new functions | |
4283 `insert-and-inherit' or `insert-before-markers-and-inherit'. | |
4284 | |
4285 The self-inserting character command does do inheritance. | |
4286 | |
4287 ** Frame creation hooks. | |
4288 | |
4289 The function make-frame now runs the normal hooks | |
4290 before-make-frame-hook and after-make-frame-hook. | |
4291 | |
4292 ** You can now use function-key-map to make a key an alias for other | |
4293 key sequences that can vary depending on circumstances. To do this, | |
4294 give the key a definition in function-key-map which is a function | |
4295 rather than a specific expansion key sequence. | |
4296 | |
4297 If the function reads input itself, it can have the effect of altering | |
4298 the event that follows. For example, here's how to define C-c h to | |
4299 turn the character that follows into a hyper character: | |
4300 | |
4301 (define-key function-key-map "\C-ch" 'hyperify) | |
4302 | |
4303 (defun hyperify (prompt) | |
4304 (let ((e (read-event))) | |
4305 (vector (if (numberp e) | |
4306 (logior (lsh 1 20) e) | |
4307 (if (memq 'hyper (event-modifiers e)) | |
4308 e | |
4309 (add-event-modifier "H-" e)))))) | |
4310 | |
4311 (defun add-event-modifier (string e) | |
4312 (let ((symbol (if (symbolp e) e (car e)))) | |
4313 (setq symbol (intern (concat string (symbol-name symbol)))) | |
4314 (if (symbolp e) | |
4315 symbol | |
4316 (cons symbol (cdr e))))) | |
4317 | |
4318 The character translation function gets one argument, which is the | |
4319 prompt that was specified in read-key-sequence--or nil if the key | |
4320 sequence is being read by the editor command loop. In most cases | |
4321 you can just ignore the prompt value. | |
4322 | |
4323 ** Changes for reading and writing text properties. | |
4324 | |
4325 New low-level Lisp features make it possible to write Lisp programs to | |
4326 save text properties in files, and read text properties from files. | |
4327 You can program any file format you like. | |
4328 | |
4329 The variable `write-region-annotation-functions' should contain a list | |
4330 of functions to be run by `write-region' to encode text properties in | |
4331 some fashion as annotations to the text that is written. | |
4332 | |
4333 Each function in the list is called with two arguments: the start and | |
4334 end of the region to be written. These functions should not alter the | |
4335 contents of the buffer. Instead, they should return lists indicating | |
4336 annotations to write in the file in addition to the text in the | |
4337 buffer. | |
4338 | |
4339 Each function should return a list of elements of the form (POSITION | |
4340 . STRING), where POSITION is an integer specifying the relative | |
4341 position in the text to be written, and STRING is the annotation to | |
4342 add there. | |
4343 | |
4344 Each list returned by one of these functions must be already sorted in | |
4345 increasing order by POSITION. If there is more than one function, | |
4346 `write-region' merges the lists destructively into one sorted list. | |
4347 | |
4348 When `write-region' actually writes the text from the buffer to the | |
4349 file, it intermixes the specified annotations at the corresponding | |
4350 positions. All this takes place without modifying the buffer. | |
4351 | |
4352 The variable `after-insert-file-functions' should contain a list of | |
4353 functions to be run each time a file's contents have been inserted into | |
4354 a buffer. Each function receives one argument, the length of the | |
4355 inserted text; point indicates the start of that text. The function | |
4356 should make whatever changes it wants to make, then return the updated | |
4357 length of the inserted text, as it stands after those changes. The | |
4358 value returned by one function is used as the argument to the next. | |
4359 These functions should always return with point at the beginning of | |
4360 the inserted text. | |
4361 | |
4362 The intended use of `after-insert-file-functions' is for converting | |
4363 some sort of textual annotations into actual text properties. But many | |
4364 other uses may be possible. | |
4365 | |
4366 We now invite users to begin implementing Lisp programs to store and | |
4367 retrieve text properties in files, using these new primitive features, | |
4368 and thus to experiment with various data formats and find good ones. | |
4369 | |
4370 We suggest not trying to handle arbitrary Lisp objects as property | |
4371 names or property values--because a program that general is probably | |
4372 difficult to write, and slow. Instead, choose a set of possible data | |
4373 types that are reasonably flexible, and not too hard to encode. | |
4374 | |
4375 ** Comint completion. | |
4376 | |
4377 Currently comint-dynamic-complete-command (and associated variable | |
4378 comint-after-partial-pathname-command) are set by default to complete a | |
4379 filename. Other comint-mode users should have their own functions to achieve | |
4380 this. For example, gud-mode could complete debugger commands. A completion | |
4381 function is provided solely for this reason (comint-dynamic-simple-complete). | |
4382 | |
4383 Other comint-mode users should bind comint-dynamic-complete (shell-mode does | |
4384 already). | |
4385 | |
4386 ** Comint history reference expansion | |
4387 | |
4388 Currently comint-input-autoexpand is 'history, which means only expand | |
4389 history on insertion to comint-input-ring. For non-shell modes, this is | |
4390 a strange default, since non-shells will not understand history references. | |
4391 Perhaps it would be better for the variable to be 'input, which means expand | |
4392 on RET. | |
4393 | |
4394 The value 'history might possibly be wrong even for shells, since the | |
4395 expansion will be done both by comint and the underlying shell (except sh, of | |
4396 course). It would be better for expansion to be done by one or the other, | |
4397 not both since they may (ahem) disagree. Since it is silly to put a literal | |
4398 history reference into comint-input-ring, perhaps it would be better for the | |
4399 variable to be 'input too. | |
4400 | |
4401 The reason the variable is not 'input by default is that I was attempting to | |
4402 adhere to The Principle of Least Astonishment. I didn't want to shock users | |
4403 by having their input change in front of their eyes. | |
4404 | |
4405 ** Argument delimiters and Comint mode. | |
4406 | |
4407 Currently comint-delimiter-argument-list is '(), which means no strings are | |
4408 to be treated as delimiters and arguments. In shell-mode, this variable is | |
4409 set to shell-delimiter-argument-list, '("|" "&" "<" ">" "(" ")" ";"). Other | |
4410 comint-mode users should set this variable too. For example, a lisp-type | |
4411 mode might want to set this to '("." "(" ")") or some such. | |
4412 | |
4413 ** Comint output hook. | |
4414 | |
4415 There is now a hook, comint-output-filter-hook, that is run-hooks'ed by the | |
4416 output filter, comint-output-filter. This is useful for scrolling (see | |
4417 below), but also things like processing output for specific text, output | |
4418 highlighting, etc. | |
4419 | |
4420 So that such output processing may be done efficiently, there is a new | |
4421 variable, comint-last-output-start, that records the position of the start of | |
4422 the lastest output inserted into the buffer (effectively the previous value | |
4423 of process-mark). Output processing functions should process the text | |
4424 between comint-last-output-start (or perhaps the beginning of the line that | |
4425 the position lies on) and process-mark. | |
4426 | |
4427 ** Comint scrolling. | |
4428 | |
4429 There is now automatic scrolling of process windows. | |
4430 | |
4431 Currently comint-scroll-show-maximum-output is t, which means when scrolling | |
4432 output put process-mark at the bottom of the window. There is a good case | |
4433 for it to be t, since the user is likely to want to see as much output as | |
4434 possible. But, then again, there is a comint-show-maximum-output command. | |
4435 | |
4436 ** Comint history retrieval. | |
4437 | |
4438 The input following point is not deleted when moving around the input history | |
4439 (with M-p etc.). Emacs maintainers may not like this. However, I feel this | |
4440 is a useful feature. The simple remedy is to put end-of-line in before | |
4441 delete-region in comint-previous-matching-input. | |
4442 | |
4443 The input history retrieval commands still wrap-around the input ring, unlike | |
4444 Emacs command history. | |
4445 | |
4446 * Changes in version 19.19. | |
4447 | |
4448 ** The new package bookmark.el records named bookmarks: positions that | |
4449 you can jump to. Bookmarks are saved automatically between Emacs | |
4450 sessions. | |
4451 | |
4452 ** Another simpler package saveplace.el records your position in each | |
4453 file when you kill its buffer (or kill Emacs), and jumps to the same | |
4454 position when you visit the file again (even in another Emacs | |
4455 session). Use `toggle-save-place' to turn on place-saving in a given file; | |
4456 use (setq-default save-place t) to turn it on for all files. | |
4457 | |
4458 ** In Outline mode, you can now customize how to compute the level of a | |
4459 heading line. Set `outline-level' to a function of no arguments which | |
4460 returns the level, assuming point is at the beginning of a heading | |
4461 line. | |
4462 | |
4463 ** You can now specify the prefix key to use for Outline minor mode. | |
4464 (The default is C-c.) Set the variable outline-minor-mode-prefix to | |
4465 the key sequence you want to use (as a string or vector). | |
4466 | |
4467 ** In Bibtex mode, C-c e has been changed to C-c C-b. This is because | |
4468 C-c followed by a letter is reserved for users. | |
4469 | |
4470 ** The `mod' function is no longer an alias for `%', but is a separate function | |
4471 that yields a result with the same sign as the divisor. `floor' now takes an | |
4472 optional second argument, which divides the first argument before the floor is | |
4473 taken. | |
4474 | |
4475 ** `%' no longer allows floating point arguments, since the results were often | |
4476 inconsistent with integer `%'. | |
4477 | |
4478 * Changes in version 19.18. | |
4479 | |
4480 ** Typing C-z in an iconified Emacs frame now deiconifies it. | |
4481 | |
4482 ** hilit19 is a new library for automatic highlighting of parts of the | |
4483 text in the buffer, based on its meaning and context. | |
4484 | |
4485 ** Killing no longer sends the killed text to the X clipboard. | |
4486 And large strings are not put in the cut buffer either. | |
4487 The variable x-cut-buffer-max specifies the maximum number of characters | |
4488 to put in the cut buffer. | |
4489 | |
4490 ** The new command C-x 5 o (other-frame) selects different frames, | |
4491 successively, in cyclic order. It does for frames what C-x o | |
4492 does for windows. | |
4493 | |
4494 ** The command M-ESC (eval-expression) has its own command history. | |
4495 | |
4496 ** The commands M-! and M-| for running shell commands have their own | |
4497 command history. | |
4498 | |
4499 ** If the directory containing the Emacs executable has a sibling named | |
4500 `lisp', that `lisp' directory is added to the end of `load-path' | |
4501 (provided you don't override the normal value with the EMACSLOADPATH | |
4502 environment variable). This feature may make it easier to move | |
4503 an installed Emacs from place to place. | |
4504 | |
4505 ** M-x validate-tex-buffer now records the locations of mismatches | |
4506 found in the `*Occur*' buffer. You can go to that buffer and type C-c | |
4507 C-c to visit a particular mismatch. | |
4508 | |
4509 ** There are new commands in Shell mode. | |
4510 | |
4511 C-c C-n and C-c C-p move point to the next or previous shell input line. | |
4512 | |
4513 C-c C-d is now another way to send an end-of-file to the subshell. | |
4514 | |
4515 ** Changes to calendar/diary. | |
4516 | |
4517 Time zone data is now determined automatically, including the | |
4518 start/stop days and times of daylight savings time. The code now | |
4519 works correctly almost anywhere in the world. | |
4520 | |
4521 The format of the holiday specifications has changed and IS NO LONGER | |
4522 COMPATIBLE with the old (version 18) format. See the documentation of | |
4523 the variable calendar-holidays for details of the new, improved | |
4524 format. | |
4525 | |
4526 The hook `diary-display-hook' has been split into two: | |
4527 diary-display-hook which should be used ONLY for the display and | |
4528 `diary-hook' which should be used for appointment notification. If | |
4529 diary-display-hook is nil (the default), simple-diary-display is | |
4530 used. This allows the diary hooks to be correctly set with add-hook. | |
4531 | |
4532 The forms used for dates in diary entries and general display are no | |
4533 longer autoloaded, but set at load time; this means they will be set | |
4534 correctly based on values you assign to various variables. | |
4535 | |
4536 ** The functions x-rebind-key and x-rebind-keys have been deleted, | |
4537 because you can accomplish the same job by binding keys to keyboard | |
4538 macros. | |
4539 | |
4540 ** Emacs now distinguishes double and triple drag events and double and | |
4541 triple button-down events. These work analogously to double and | |
4542 triple click events. | |
4543 | |
4544 Double drag events, if not defined, convert to ordinary click events. | |
4545 Double down events, if not defined, convert first to ordinary down | |
4546 events, which are then discarded if not defined. Triple events that | |
4547 are not defined convert to the corresponding double event; if that is | |
4548 also not defined, it may convert further. | |
4549 | |
4550 ** The new function event-click-count returns the number of clicks, | |
4551 from an event which is a list. It is 1 for an ordinary click, drag, | |
4552 or button-down event, 2 for a double event, and 3 or more for a triple | |
4553 event. | |
4554 | |
4555 ** The new function previous-frame is like next-frame, but moves | |
4556 around through the set of existing frames in the opposite order. | |
4557 | |
4558 ** The post-command-hook now runs even after commands that get an error | |
4559 and return to top level. As a consequence of the same change, this | |
4560 hook also runs before Emacs reads the first command. That might sound | |
4561 paradoxical, as if this hook were the same as the pre-command-hook. | |
4562 Actually, they are not similar; the latter runs before *execution* of | |
4563 a command, but after it has been read. | |
4564 | |
4565 ** You can turn off the text property hooks that run when point moves | |
4566 to certain places in the buffer, by binding inhibit-point-motion-hooks | |
4567 to a non-nil value. | |
4568 | |
4569 ** Inserting a string with no text properties into the buffer normally | |
4570 inherits the properties of the preceding character. You can now | |
4571 control this inheritance by setting the front-sticky and | |
4572 rear-nonsticky properties of a character. | |
4573 | |
4574 If you make a character's front-sticky property t, then insertion | |
4575 before the character inherits its properties. If you make the | |
4576 rear-nonsticky property t, then insertion after the character does not | |
4577 inherit its properties. You can regard characters as normally being | |
4578 rear-sticky and not front-sticky, and this is why insertion normally | |
4579 inherits from the previous character. | |
4580 | |
4581 If neither side of an insertion is suitably sticky, then the inserted | |
4582 text gets no properties. If both sides are sticky, then the inserted | |
4583 text gets the properties of both sides, with the previous character's | |
4584 properties taking precedence when both sides have a property in | |
4585 common. | |
4586 | |
4587 You can also specify stickiness for individual properties. To do so, | |
4588 use a list of property names as the value of the front-sticky property | |
4589 or the rear-nonsticky property. For example, if a character has a | |
4590 rear-nonsticky property whose value is (face read-only), then | |
4591 insertion after the character will not inherit its face property or | |
4592 read-only property (if any), but will inherit any other properties. | |
4593 | |
4594 The merging of properties when both sides of the insertion are sticky | |
4595 takes place one property at a time. If the preceding character is | |
4596 rear-sticky for the property, and the property is non-nil, it | |
4597 dominates. Otherwise, the following character's property value is | |
4598 used if it is front-sticky for that property. | |
4599 | |
4600 ** If you give a character a non-nil `invisible' text property, the | |
4601 character does not appear on the screen. This works much like | |
4602 selective display. | |
4603 | |
4604 The details of this feature are likely to change in future Emacs | |
4605 versions. | |
4606 | |
4607 ** In Info, when you go to a node, it runs the normal hook | |
4608 Info-selection-hook. | |
4609 | |
4610 ** You can use the new function `invocation-directory' to get the name | |
4611 of the directory containing the Emacs executable that was run. | |
4612 | |
4613 ** Entry to the minibuffer runs the normal hook minibuffer-setup-hook. | |
4614 | |
4615 ** The new function minibuffer-window-active-p takes one argument, a | |
4616 minibuffer window, and returns t if the window is currently active. | |
4617 | |
4618 * Changes in version 19.17. | |
4619 | |
4620 ** When Emacs displays a list of completions in a buffer, | |
4621 you can select a completion by clicking mouse button 2 | |
4622 on that completion. | |
4623 | |
4624 ** Use the command `list-faces-display' to display a list of | |
4625 all the currently defined faces, showing what they look like. | |
4626 | |
4627 ** Menu bar items from local maps now come after the usual items. | |
4628 | |
4629 ** The Help menu bar item always comes last in the menu bar. | |
4630 | |
4631 ** If you enable Font-Lock mode on a buffer containing a program | |
4632 (certain languages such as C and Lisp are supported), everything you | |
4633 type is automatically given a face property appropriate to its | |
4634 syntactic role. For example, there are faces for comments, string | |
4635 constants, names of functions being defined, and so on. | |
4636 | |
4637 ** Dunnet, an adventure game, is now available. | |
4638 | |
4639 ** Several major modes now have their own menu bar items, | |
4640 including Dired, Rmail, and Sendmail. We would like to add | |
4641 suitable menu bar items to other major modes. | |
4642 | |
4643 ** The key binding C-x a C-h has been eliminated. | |
4644 This is because it got in the way of the general feature of typing | |
4645 C-h after a prefix character. If you want to run | |
4646 inverse-add-global-abbrev, you can use C-x a - or C-x a i g instead. | |
4647 | |
4648 ** If you set the variable `rmail-mail-new-frame' to a non-nil value, | |
4649 all the Rmail commands to send mail make a new frame to do it in. | |
4650 When you send the message, or use the menu bar command not to send it, | |
4651 that frame is deleted. | |
4652 | |
4653 ** In Rmail, the o and C-o commands are now almost interchangeable. | |
4654 Both commands check the format of the file you specify, and append | |
4655 the message to it in Rmail format if it is an Rmail file, and in | |
4656 inbox file format otherwise. C-o and o are different only when you | |
4657 specify a new file. | |
4658 | |
4659 ** The function `copy-face' now takes an optional fourth argument | |
4660 NEW-FRAME. If you specify this, it copies the definition of face | |
4661 OLD-FACE on frame FRAME to face NEW-NAME on frame NEW-FRAME. | |
4662 | |
4663 ** A local map can now cancel out one of the global map's menu items. | |
4664 Just define that subcommand of the menu item with `undefined' | |
4665 as the definition. For example, this cancels out the `Buffers' item | |
4666 for the current major mode: | |
4667 | |
4668 (local-set-key [menu-bar buffer] 'undefined) | |
4669 | |
4670 ** To put global items at the end of the menu bar, use the new variable | |
4671 `menu-bar-final-items'. It should be a list of symbols--event types | |
4672 bound in the menu bar. The menu bar items for these symbols are | |
4673 moved to the end. | |
4674 | |
4675 ** The list returned by `buffer-local-variables' now contains cons-cell | |
4676 elements of the form (SYMBOL . VALUE) only for buffer-local variables | |
4677 that have values. For unbound buffer-local variables, the variable | |
4678 name (symbol) appears directly as an element of the list. | |
4679 | |
4680 ** The `modification-hooks' property of a character no longer affects | |
4681 insertion; it runs only for deletion and modification of the character. | |
4682 | |
4683 To detect insertion, use `insert-in-front-hooks' and | |
4684 `insert-behind-hooks' properties. The former runs when text is | |
4685 inserted immediately preceding the character that has the property; | |
4686 the latter runs when text is inserted immediately following the | |
4687 character. | |
4688 | |
4689 ** Buffer modification now runs hooks belonging to overlays as well as | |
4690 hooks belonging to characters. If an overlay has a | |
4691 `modification-hooks' property, it applies to any change to text in the | |
4692 overlay, and any insertion within the overlay. If the overlay has a | |
4693 `insert-in-front-hooks' property, it runs for insertion at the | |
4694 beginning boundary of the overlay. If the overlay has an | |
4695 `insert-behind-hooks' property, it runs for insertion at the end | |
4696 boundary of the overlay. | |
4697 | |
4698 The values of these properties should be lists of functions. Each | |
4699 function is called, receiving as arguments the overlay in question, | |
4700 followed by the bounds of the range being modified. | |
4701 | |
4702 ** The new `-name NAME' option directs Emacs to search for its X | |
4703 resources using the name `NAME', and sets the title of the initial | |
4704 frame. This argument was added for consistency with other X clients. | |
4705 | |
4706 ** The new `-xrm DATABASE' option tells Emacs to treat the string | |
4707 DATABASE as the text of an X resource database. Emacs searches | |
4708 DATABASE for resource values, in addition to the usual places. This | |
4709 argument was added for consistency with other X clients. | |
4710 | |
4711 ** Emacs now searches for X resources in the files specified by the | |
4712 XFILESEARCHPATH, XUSERFILESEARCHPATH, and XAPPLRESDIR environment | |
4713 variables, emulating the functionality provided by programs written | |
4714 using Xt. Because of this change, Emacs will now notice system-wide | |
4715 application defaults files, as other X clients do. | |
4716 | |
4717 XFILESEARCHPATH and XUSERFILESEARCHPATH should be a list of file names | |
4718 separated by colons; XAPPLRESDIR should be a list of directory names | |
4719 separated by colons. | |
4720 | |
4721 Emacs searches for X resources | |
4722 + specified on the command line, with the `-xrm RESOURCESTRING' | |
4723 option, | |
4724 + then in the value of the XENVIRONMENT environment variable, | |
4725 - or if that is unset, in the file named ~/.Xdefaults-HOSTNAME if it exists | |
4726 (where HOSTNAME is the hostname of the machine Emacs is running on), | |
4727 + then in the screen-specific and server-wide resource properties | |
4728 provided by the server, | |
4729 - or if those properties are unset, in the file named ~/.Xdefaults | |
4730 if it exists, | |
4731 + then in the files listed in XUSERFILESEARCHPATH, | |
4732 - or in files named LANG/Emacs in directories listed in XAPPLRESDIR | |
4733 (where LANG is the value of the LANG environment variable), if | |
4734 the LANG environment variable is set, | |
4735 - or in files named Emacs in the directories listed in XAPPLRESDIR | |
4736 - or in ~/LANG/Emacs (if the LANG environment variable is set), | |
4737 - or in ~/Emacs, | |
4738 + then in the files listed in XFILESEARCHPATH. | |
4739 | |
4740 The paths in the variables XFILESEARCHPATH, XUSERFILESEARCHPATH, and | |
4741 XAPPLRESDIR may contain %-escapes (like the control strings passed to | |
4742 the the Emacs lisp `format' function or C printf function), which | |
4743 Emacs expands. | |
4744 | |
4745 %N is replaced by the string "Emacs" wherever it occurs. | |
4746 %T is replaced by "app-defaults" wherever it occurs. | |
4747 %S is replaced by the empty string wherever it occurs. | |
4748 %L and %l are replaced by the value of the LANG environment variable; if LANG | |
4749 is not set, Emacs does not use that directory or file name at all. | |
4750 %C is replaced by the value of the resource named "customization" | |
4751 (class "Customization"), as retrieved from the server's resource | |
4752 properties or the user's ~/.Xdefaults file, or the empty string if | |
4753 that resource doesn't exist. | |
4754 | |
4755 So, for example, | |
4756 if XFILESEARCHPATH is set to the value | |
4757 "/usr/lib/X11/%L/%T/%N%C:/usr/lib/X11/%T/%N%C:/usr/lib/X11/%T/%N", | |
4758 and the LANG environment variable is set to | |
4759 "english", | |
4760 and the customization resource is the string | |
4761 "-color", | |
4762 then, in the last step of the process described above, Emacs checks | |
4763 for resources in the first of the following files that is present and | |
4764 readable: | |
4765 /usr/lib/X11/english/app-defaults/Emacs-color | |
4766 /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/Emacs-color | |
4767 /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/Emacs | |
4768 If the LANG environment variable is not set, then Emacs never uses the | |
4769 first element of the path, "/usr/lib/X11/%L/%T/%N%C", because it | |
4770 contains the %L escape. | |
4771 | |
4772 If XFILESEARCHPATH is unset, Emacs uses the default value | |
4773 "/usr/lib/X11/%L/app-defaults/Emacs%C:\ | |
4774 /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/Emacs%C:\ | |
4775 /usr/lib/X11/%L/app-defaults/Emacs:\ | |
4776 /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/Emacs" | |
4777 | |
4778 This feature was added for consistency with other X applications. | |
4779 | |
4780 ** The new function `text-property-any' scans the region of text from | |
4781 START to END to see if any character's property PROP is `eq' to | |
4782 VALUE. If so, it returns the position of the first such character. | |
4783 Otherwise, it returns nil. | |
4784 | |
4785 The optional fifth argument, OBJECT, specifies the string or buffer to | |
4786 be examined. | |
4787 | |
4788 ** The new function `text-property-not-all' scans the region of text from | |
4789 START to END to see if any character's property PROP is not `eq' to | |
4790 VALUE. If so, it returns the position of the first such character. | |
4791 Otherwise, it returns nil. | |
4792 | |
4793 The optional fifth argument, OBJECT, specifies the string or buffer to | |
4794 be examined. | |
4795 | |
4796 ** The function `delete-windows-on' now takes an optional second | |
4797 argument FRAME, which specifies which frames it should affect. | |
4798 + If FRAME is nil or omitted, then `delete-windows-on' deletes windows | |
4799 showing BUFFER (its first argument) on all frames. | |
4800 + If FRAME is t, then `delete-windows-on' only deletes windows on the | |
4801 selected frame; other frames are unaffected. | |
4802 + If FRAME is a frame, then `delete-windows-on' only deletes windows on | |
4803 the given frame; other frames are unaffected. | |
4804 | |
4805 | |
4806 * Changes in version 19.16. | |
4807 | |
4808 ** When dragging the mouse to select a region, Emacs now highlights the | |
4809 region as you drag (if Transient Mark mode is enabled). If you | |
4810 continue the drag beyond the boundaries of the window, Emacs scrolls | |
4811 the window at a steady rate until you either move the mouse back into | |
4812 the window or release the button. | |
4813 | |
4814 ** RET now exits `query-replace' and `query-replace-regexp'; this makes it | |
4815 more consistent with the incremental search facility, which uses RET | |
4816 to end the search. | |
4817 | |
4818 ** In C mode, C-c C-u now runs c-up-conditional. | |
4819 C-c C-n and C-c C-p now run new commands that move forward | |
4820 and back over balanced sets of C conditionals (c-forward-conditional | |
4821 and c-backward-conditional). | |
4822 | |
4823 ** The Edit entry in the menu bar has a new alternative: | |
4824 "Choose Next Paste". It gives you a menu showing the various | |
4825 strings in the kill ring; click on one to select it as the text | |
4826 to be yanked ("pasted") the next time you yank. | |
4827 | |
4828 ** If you enable Transient Mark mode and set `mark-even-if-inactive' to | |
4829 non-nil, then the region is highlighted in a transient fashion just as | |
4830 normally in Transient Mark mode, but the mark really remains active | |
4831 all the time; commands that use the region can be used even if the | |
4832 region highlighting turns off. | |
4833 | |
4834 ** If you type C-h after a prefix key, it displays the bindings | |
4835 that start with that prefix. | |
4836 | |
4837 ** The VC package now searches for version control commands in the | |
4838 directories named by the variable `vc-path'; its value should be a | |
4839 list of strings. | |
4840 | |
4841 ** If you are visiting a file that has locks registered under RCS, | |
4842 VC now displays each lock's owner and version number in the mode line | |
4843 after the string `RCS'. If there are no locks, VC displays the head | |
4844 version number. | |
4845 | |
4846 ** When using X, if you load the `paren' library, Emacs automatically | |
4847 underlines or highlights the matching paren whenever point is | |
4848 next to the outside of a paren. When point is before an open-paren, | |
4849 this shows the matching close; when point is after a close-paren, | |
4850 this shows the matching open. | |
4851 | |
4852 ** The new function `define-key-after' is like `define-key', | |
4853 but takes an extra argument AFTER. It places the newly defined | |
4854 binding after the binding for the event AFTER. | |
4855 | |
4856 ** `accessible-keymaps' now takes an optional second argument, PREFIX. | |
4857 If PREFIX is non-nil, it means the value should include only maps for | |
4858 keys that start with PREFIX. | |
4859 | |
4860 `describe-bindings' also accepts an optional argument PREFIX which | |
4861 means to describe only the keys that start with PREFIX. | |
4862 | |
4863 ** The variable `prefix-help-command' hold a command to run to display help | |
4864 whenever the character `help-char' follows a prefix key and does not have | |
4865 a key binding in that context. | |
4866 | |
4867 ** Emacs now detects double- and triple-mouse clicks. A single mouse | |
4868 click produces a pair events of the form: | |
4869 (down-mouse-N POSITION) | |
4870 (mouse-N POSITION) | |
4871 Clicking the same mouse button again, soon thereafter and at the same | |
4872 location, produces another pair of events of the form: | |
4873 (down-mouse-N POSITION) | |
4874 (double-mouse-N POSITION 2) | |
4875 Another click will produce an event pair of the form: | |
4876 (down-mouse-N POSITION) | |
4877 (triple-mouse-N POSITION 3) | |
4878 All the POSITIONs in such a sequence would be identical, except for | |
4879 their timestamps. | |
4880 | |
4881 To count as double- and triple-clicks, mouse clicks must be at the | |
4882 same location as the first click, and the number of milliseconds | |
4883 between the first release and the second must be less than the value | |
4884 of the lisp variable `double-click-time'. Setting `double-click-time' | |
4885 to nil disables multi-click detection. Setting it to t removes the | |
4886 time limit; Emacs then detects multi-clicks by position only. | |
4887 | |
4888 If `read-key-sequence' finds no binding for a double-click event, but | |
4889 the corresponding single-click event would be bound, | |
4890 `read-key-sequence' demotes it to a single-click. Similarly, it | |
4891 demotes unbound triple-clicks to double- or single-clicks. This means | |
4892 you don't have to distinguish between single- and multi-clicks if you | |
4893 don't want to. | |
4894 | |
4895 Emacs reports all clicks after the third as `triple-mouse-N' clicks, | |
4896 but increments the click count after POSITION. For example, a fourth | |
4897 click, soon after the third and at the same location, produces a pair | |
4898 of events of the form: | |
4899 (down-mouse-N POSITION) | |
4900 (triple-mouse-N POSITION 4) | |
4901 | |
4902 ** The way Emacs reports positions of mouse events has changed | |
4903 slightly. If a mouse event includes a position list of the form: | |
4904 (WINDOW (PLACE-SYMBOL) (COLUMN . ROW) TIMESTAMP) | |
4905 this denotes exactly the same position as the list: | |
4906 (WINDOW PLACE-SYMBOL (COLUMN . ROW) TIMESTAMP) | |
4907 That is, the event occurred over a non-textual area of the frame, | |
4908 specified by PLACE-SYMBOL, a symbol like `mode-line' or | |
4909 `vertical-scroll-bar'. | |
4910 | |
4911 Enclosing PLACE-SYMBOL in a singleton list does not change the | |
4912 position denoted, but the `read-key-sequence' function uses the | |
4913 presence or absence of the singleton list to tell whether or not it | |
4914 should prefix the event with its place symbol. | |
4915 | |
4916 Normally, `read-key-sequence' prefixes mouse events occurring over | |
4917 non-textual areas with their PLACE-SYMBOLs, to select the sub-keymap | |
4918 appropriate for the event; for example, clicking on the mode line | |
4919 produces a sequence like | |
4920 [mode-line (mouse-1 POSN)] | |
4921 However, if lisp code elects to unread the resulting key sequence by | |
4922 placing it in the `unread-command-events' variable, it is important | |
4923 that `read-key-sequence' not insert the prefix symbol again; that | |
4924 would produce a malformed key sequence like | |
4925 [mode-line mode-line (mouse-1 POSN)] | |
4926 For this reason, `read-key-sequence' encloses the event's PLACE-SYMBOL | |
4927 in a singleton list when it first inserts the prefix, but doesn't | |
4928 insert the prefix when processing events whose PLACE-SYMBOLs are | |
4929 already thus enclosed. | |
4930 | |
4931 | |
4932 * Changes in version 19.15. | |
4933 | |
4934 ** `make-frame-visible', which uniconified frames, is now a command, | |
4935 and thus may be bound to a key. This makes sense because frames | |
4936 respond to user input while iconified. | |
4937 | |
4938 ** You can now use Meta mouse clicks to set and use the "secondary | |
4939 selection". You can drag M-Mouse-1 across the region you want to | |
4940 select. Or you can press M-Mouse-1 at one end and M-Mouse-3 at the | |
4941 other (this also copies the text to the kill ring). Repeating M-Mouse-3 | |
4942 again at the same place kills that text. | |
4943 | |
4944 M-Mouse-2 kills the secondary selection. | |
4945 | |
4946 Setting the secondary selection does not move point or the mark. It | |
4947 is possible to make a secondary selection that does not all fit on the | |
4948 screen, by using M-Mouse-1 at one end, scrolling, then using M-Mouse-3 | |
4949 at the other end. | |
4950 | |
4951 Emacs has only one secondary selection at any time. Starting to set | |
4952 a new one cancels any previous one. The secondary selection displays | |
4953 using a face named `secondary-selection'. | |
4954 | |
4955 ** There's a new way to request use of Supercite (sc.el). Do this: | |
4956 | |
4957 (add-hook 'mail-citation-hook 'sc-cite-original) | |
4958 | |
4959 Currently this works with Rmail. In the future, other Emacs based | |
4960 mail-readers should be modified to understand this hook also. | |
4961 In the mean time, you should keep doing what you have done in the past | |
4962 for those other mail readers. | |
4963 | |
4964 ** When a regular expression contains `\(...\)' inside a repetition | |
4965 operator such as `*' or `+', and you ask about the range that was matched | |
4966 using `match-beginning' and `match-end', the range you get corresponds | |
4967 to the *last* repetition *only*. In Emacs 18, you would get a range | |
4968 corresponding to all the repetitions. | |
4969 | |
4970 If you want to get a range corresponding to all the repetitions, | |
4971 put a `\(...\)' grouping *outside* the repetition operator. This | |
4972 is the syntax that corresponds logically to the desired result, and | |
4973 it works the same in Emacs 18 and Emacs 19. | |
4974 | |
4975 (This change actually took place earlier, but we didn't know about it | |
4976 and thus didn't document it.) | |
4977 | |
4978 * Changes in version 19.14. | |
4979 | |
4980 ** To modify read-only text, bind the variable `inhibit-read-only' | |
4981 to a non-nil value. If the value is t, then all reasons that might | |
4982 make text read-only are inhibited (including `read-only' text properties). | |
4983 If the value is a list, then a `read-only' property is inhibited | |
4984 if it is `memq' in the list. | |
4985 | |
4986 ** If you call `get-buffer-window' passing t as its second argument, it | |
4987 will only search for windows on visible frames. Previously, passing t | |
4988 as the secord argument caused `get-buffer-window' to search all | |
4989 frames, visible or not. | |
4990 | |
4991 ** If you call `other-buffer' with a nil or omitted second argument, it | |
4992 will ignore buffers displayed windows on any visible frame, not just | |
4993 the selected frame. | |
4994 | |
4995 ** You can specify a window or a frame for C-x # to use when | |
4996 selects a server buffer. Set the variable server-window | |
4997 to the window or frame that you want. | |
4998 | |
4999 ** The command M-( now inserts spaces outside the open-parentheses in | |
5000 some cases--depending on the syntax classes of the surrounding | |
5001 characters. If the variable `parens-dont-require-spaces' is non-nil, | |
5002 it inhibits insertion of these spaces. | |
5003 | |
5004 ** The GUD package now supports the debugger known as xdb on HP/UX | |
5005 systems. Use M-x xdb. The variable `gud-xdb-directories' lets you | |
5006 specify a list of directories to search for source code. | |
5007 | |
5008 ** If you are using the mailabbrev package, you should note that its | |
5009 function for defining an alias is now called `define-mail-abbrev'. | |
5010 This package no longer contains a definition for `define-mail-alias'; | |
5011 that name is used only in mailaliases. | |
5012 | |
5013 ** Inserted characters now inherit the properties of the text before | |
5014 them, by default, rather than those of the following text. | |
5015 | |
5016 ** The function `insert-file-contents' now takes optional arguments BEG | |
5017 and END that specify which part of the file to insert. BEG defaults to | |
5018 0 (the beginning of the file), and END defaults to the end of the file. | |
5019 | |
5020 If you specify BEG or END, then the argument VISIT must be nil. | |
5021 | |
5022 * Changes in version 19.13. | |
5023 | |
5024 ** Magic file names can now handle the `load' operation. | |
5025 | |
5026 ** Bibtex mode now sets up special entries in the menu bar. | |
5027 | |
5028 ** The incremental search commands C-w and C-y, which copy text from | |
5029 the buffer into the search string, now convert it to lower case | |
5030 if you are in a case-insensitive search. This is to avoid making | |
5031 the search a case-sensitive one. | |
5032 | |
5033 ** GNUS now knows your time zone automatically if Emacs does. | |
5034 | |
5035 ** Hide-ifdef mode no longer defines keys of the form | |
5036 C-c LETTER, since those keys are reserved for users. | |
5037 Those commands have been moved to C-c M-LETTER. | |
5038 We may move them again for greater consistency with other modes. | |
5039 | |
5040 * Changes in version 19.12. | |
5041 | |
5042 ** You can now make many of the sort commands ignore case by setting | |
5043 `sort-fold-case' to a non-nil value. | |
5044 | |
5045 * Changes in version 19.11. | |
5046 | |
5047 ** Supercite is installed. | |
5048 | |
5049 ** `write-file-hooks' functions that return non-nil are responsible | |
5050 for making a backup file if you want that to be done. | |
5051 To do so, execute the following code: | |
5052 | |
5053 (or buffer-backed-up (backup-buffer)) | |
5054 | |
5055 You might wish to save the file modes value returned by | |
5056 `backup-buffer' and use that to set the mode bits of the file | |
5057 that you write. This is what `basic-save-buffer' does when | |
5058 it writes a file in the usual way. | |
5059 | |
5060 (This is not actually new, but wasn't documented before.) | |
5061 | |
5062 * Changes in version 19.10. | |
5063 | |
5064 ** The command `repeat-complex-command' is now on C-x ESC ESC. | |
5065 It used to be bound to C-x ESC. | |
5066 | |
5067 The reason for this change is to make function keys work after C-x. | |
5068 | |
5069 ** The variable `highlight-nonselected-windows' now controls whether | |
5070 the region is highlighted in windows other than the selected window | |
5071 (in Transient Mark mode only, of course, and currently only when | |
5072 using X). | |
5073 | |
5074 * Changes in version 19.8. | |
5075 | |
5076 ** It is now simpler to tell Emacs to display accented characters under | |
5077 X windows. M-x standard-display-european toggles the display of | |
5078 buffer text according to the ISO Latin-1 standard. With a prefix | |
5079 argument, this command enables European character display iff the | |
5080 argument is positive. | |
5081 | |
5082 ** The `-i' command-line argument tells Emacs to use a picture of the | |
5083 GNU gnu as its icon, instead of letting the window manager choose an | |
5084 icon for it. This option used to insert a file into the current | |
5085 buffer; use `-insert' to do that now. | |
5086 | |
5087 ** The `configure' script now supports `--prefix' and `--exec-prefix' | |
5088 options. | |
5089 | |
5090 The `--prefix=PREFIXDIR' option specifies where the installation process | |
5091 should put emacs and its data files. This defaults to `/usr/local'. | |
5092 - Emacs (and the other utilities users run) go in PREFIXDIR/bin | |
5093 (unless the `--exec-prefix' option says otherwise). | |
5094 - The architecture-independent files go in PREFIXDIR/lib/emacs/VERSION | |
5095 (where VERSION is the version number of Emacs, like `19.7'). | |
5096 - The architecture-dependent files go in | |
5097 PREFIXDIR/lib/emacs/VERSION/CONFIGURATION | |
5098 (where CONFIGURATION is the configuration name, like mips-dec-ultrix4.2), | |
5099 unless the `--exec-prefix' option says otherwise. | |
5100 | |
5101 The `--exec-prefix=EXECDIR' option allows you to specify a separate | |
5102 portion of the directory tree for installing architecture-specific | |
5103 files, like executables and utility programs. If specified, | |
5104 - Emacs (and the other utilities users run) go in EXECDIR/bin, and | |
5105 - The architecture-dependent files go in | |
5106 EXECDIR/lib/emacs/VERSION/CONFIGURATION. | |
5107 EXECDIR/bin should be a directory that is normally in users' PATHs. | |
5108 | |
5109 ** When running under X, the new lisp function `x-list-fonts' | |
5110 allows code to find out which fonts are available from the X server. | |
5111 The first argument PATTERN is a string, perhaps with wildcard characters; | |
5112 the * character matches any substring, and | |
5113 the ? character matches any single character. | |
5114 PATTERN is case-insensitive. | |
5115 If the optional arguments FACE and FRAME are specified, then | |
5116 `x-list-fonts' returns only fonts the same size as FACE on FRAME. | |
5117 | |
5118 | |
5119 | |
5120 * Changes in version 19. | |
5121 | |
5122 ** When you kill buffers, Emacs now returns memory to the operating system, | |
5123 thus reducing the size of the Emacs process. All the space that you free | |
5124 up by killing buffers can now be reused for other buffers no matter what | |
5125 their sizes, or reused by other processes if Emacs doesn't need it. | |
5126 | |
5127 ** Emacs now does garbage collection and auto saving while it is waiting | |
5128 for input, which often avoids the need to do these things while you | |
5129 are typing. | |
5130 | |
5131 The variable `auto-save-timeout' says how many seconds Emacs should | |
5132 wait, after you stop typing, before it does an auto save and a garbage | |
5133 collection. | |
5134 | |
5135 ** If auto saving detects that a buffer has shrunk greatly, it refrains | |
5136 from auto saving that buffer and displays a warning. Now it also turns | |
5137 off Auto Save mode in that buffer, so that you won't get the same | |
5138 warning again. | |
5139 | |
5140 If you reenable Auto Save mode in that buffer, Emacs will start saving | |
5141 it again with no further warnings. | |
5142 | |
5143 ** A new minor mode called Line Number mode displays the current line | |
5144 number in the mode line, updating it as necessary when you move | |
5145 point. | |
5146 | |
5147 However, if the buffer is very large (larger than the value of | |
5148 `line-number-display-limit'), then the line number doesn't appear. | |
5149 This is because computing the line number can be painfully slow if the | |
5150 buffer is very large. | |
5151 | |
5152 ** You can quit while Emacs is waiting to read or write files. | |
5153 | |
5154 ** The arrow keys now have default bindings to move in the appropriate | |
5155 directions. | |
5156 | |
5157 ** You can suppress next-line's habit of inserting a newline when | |
5158 called at the end of a buffer by setting next-line-add-newlines to nil | |
5159 (it defaults to t). | |
5160 | |
5161 ** You can now get back recent minibuffer inputs conveniently. While | |
5162 in the minibuffer, type M-p to fetch the next earlier minibuffer | |
5163 input, and use M-n to fetch the next later input. | |
5164 | |
5165 There are also commands to search forward or backward through the | |
5166 history for history elements that match a regular expression. M-r | |
5167 searches older elements in the history, while M-s searches newer | |
5168 elements. By special dispensation, these commands can always use the | |
5169 minibuffer to read their arguments even though you are already in the | |
5170 minibuffer when you issue them. | |
5171 | |
5172 The history feature is available for all uses of the minibuffer, but | |
5173 there are separate history lists for different kinds of input. For | |
5174 example, there is a list for file names, used by all the commands that | |
5175 read file names. There is a list for arguments of commands like | |
5176 `query-replace'. There are also very specific history lists, such | |
5177 as the one that `compile' uses for compilation commands. | |
5178 | |
5179 ** You can now display text in a mixture of fonts and colors, using the | |
5180 "face" feature, together with the overlay and text property features. | |
5181 See the Emacs Lisp manual for details. The Emacs Users Manual describes | |
5182 how to change the colors and font of standard predefined faces. | |
5183 | |
5184 ** You can refer to files on other machines using special file name syntax: | |
5185 | |
5186 /HOST:FILENAME | |
5187 /USER@HOST:FILENAME | |
5188 | |
5189 When you do this, Emacs uses the FTP program to read and write files on | |
5190 the specified host. It logs in through FTP using your user name or the | |
5191 name USER. It may ask you for a password from time to time; this | |
5192 is used for logging in on HOST. | |
5193 | |
5194 ** Some C-x key bindings have been moved onto new prefix keys. | |
5195 | |
5196 C-x r is a prefix for registers and rectangles. | |
5197 C-x n is a prefix for narrowing. | |
5198 C-x a is a prefix for abbrev commands. | |
5199 | |
5200 C-x r C-SPC | |
5201 C-x r SPC point-to-register (Was C-x /) | |
5202 C-x r j jump-to-register (Was C-x j) | |
5203 C-x r s copy-to-register (Was C-x x) | |
5204 C-x r i insert-register (Was C-x g) | |
5205 C-x r r copy-rectangle-to-register (Was C-x r) | |
5206 C-x r k kill-rectangle | |
5207 C-x r y yank-rectangle | |
5208 C-x r o open-rectangle | |
5209 C-x r f frame-configuration-to-register | |
5210 (This saves the state of all windows in all frames.) | |
5211 C-x r w window-configuration-to-register | |
5212 (This saves the state of all windows in the selected frame.) | |
5213 | |
5214 (Use C-x r j to restore a configuration saved with C-x r f or C-x r w.) | |
5215 | |
5216 C-x n n narrow-to-region (Was C-x n) | |
5217 C-x n p narrow-to-page (Was C-x p) | |
5218 C-x n w widen (Was C-x w) | |
5219 | |
5220 C-x a l add-mode-abbrev (Was C-x C-a) | |
5221 C-x a g add-global-abbrev (Was C-x +) | |
5222 C-x a i l inverse-add-mode-abbrev (Was C-x C-h) | |
5223 C-x a i g inverse-add-global-abbrev (Was C-x -) | |
5224 C-x a e expand-abbrev (Was C-x ') | |
5225 | |
5226 (The old key bindings C-x /, C-x j, C-x x and C-x g | |
5227 have not yet been removed.) | |
5228 | |
5229 ** You can put a file name in a register to be able to visit the file | |
5230 quickly. Do this: | |
5231 | |
5232 (set-register ?CHAR '(file . NAME)) | |
5233 | |
5234 where NAME is the file name as a string. Then C-x r j CHAR finds that | |
5235 file. | |
5236 | |
5237 This is useful for files that you need to visit frequently, | |
5238 but that you don't want to keep in buffers all the time. | |
5239 | |
5240 ** The keys M-g (fill-region) and C-x a (append-to-buffer) | |
5241 have been eliminated. | |
5242 | |
5243 ** The new command `string-rectangle' inserts a specified string on | |
5244 each line of the region-rectangle. | |
5245 | |
5246 ** C-x 4 r is now `find-file-read-only-other-window'. | |
5247 | |
5248 ** C-x 4 C-o is now `display-buffer', which displays a specified buffer | |
5249 in another window without selecting it. | |
5250 | |
5251 ** Picture mode has been substantially improved. The picture editing commands | |
5252 now arrange for automatic horizontal scrolling to keep point visible | |
5253 when editing a wide buffer with truncate-lines on. Picture-mode | |
5254 initialization now does a better job of rebinding standard commands; | |
5255 it finds not just their normal keybindings, but any function keys | |
5256 attached to them. | |
5257 | |
5258 ** If you enable Transient Mark mode, then the mark becomes "inactive" | |
5259 after every command that modifies the buffer. While the mark is | |
5260 active, the region is highlighted (under X, at least). Most commands | |
5261 that use the mark give an error if the mark is inactive, but you can | |
5262 use C-x C-x to make it active again. This feature is also sometimes | |
5263 known as "Zmacs mode". | |
5264 | |
5265 ** Outline mode is now available as a minor mode. This minor mode can | |
5266 combine with any major mode; it substitutes the C-c commands of | |
5267 Outline mode for those of the major mode. Use M-x outline-minor-mode | |
5268 to enable and disable the new mode. | |
5269 | |
5270 M-x outline-mode is unchanged; it still switches to Outline mode as a | |
5271 major mode. | |
5272 | |
5273 ** The default setting of `version-control' comes from the environment | |
5274 variable VERSION_CONTROL. | |
5275 | |
5276 ** The user option for controlling whether files can set local | |
5277 variables is now called `enable-local-variables'. A value of t means | |
5278 local-variables lists are obeyed; nil means they are ignored; anything | |
5279 else means query the user. | |
5280 | |
5281 The user option for controlling use of the `eval' local variable is | |
5282 now called is `enable-local-eval'; its values are interpreted like | |
5283 those of `enable-local-variables'. | |
5284 | |
5285 ** X Window System changes: | |
5286 | |
5287 C-x 5 C-f and C-x 5 b switch to a specified file or buffer in a new | |
5288 frame. Likewise, C-x 5 m starts outgoing mail in another frame, and | |
5289 C-x 5 . finds a tag in another frame. | |
5290 | |
5291 When you are using X, C-z now iconifies the selected frame. | |
5292 | |
5293 Emacs can now exchange text with other X applications. Killing or | |
5294 copying text in Emacs now makes that text available for pasting into | |
5295 other X applications. The Emacs yanking commands now insert the | |
5296 latest selection set by other applications, and add the text to the | |
5297 kill ring. The Emacs commands for selecting and inserting text with | |
5298 the mouse now use the kill ring in the same way the keyboard killing | |
5299 and yanking commands do. | |
5300 | |
5301 The option to specify the title for the initial frame is now `-name NAME'. | |
5302 There is currently no way to specify an icon title; perhaps we will add | |
5303 one in the future. | |
5304 | |
5305 ** Undoing a deletion now puts point back where it was before the | |
5306 deletion. | |
5307 | |
5308 ** The variables that control how much undo information to save have | |
5309 been renamed to `undo-limit' and `undo-strong-limit'. They used to be | |
5310 called `undo-threshold' and `undo-high-threshold'. | |
5311 | |
5312 ** You can now use kill commands in read-only buffers. They don't | |
5313 actually change the buffer, and Emacs will beep and warn you that the | |
5314 buffer is read-only, but they do copy the text you tried to kill into | |
5315 the kill ring, so you can yank it into other buffers. | |
5316 | |
5317 ** C-o inserts the fill-prefix on the newly created line. The command | |
5318 M-^ deletes the prefix (if it occurs) after the newline that it | |
5319 deletes. | |
5320 | |
5321 ** C-M-l now runs the command `reposition-window'. It scrolls the | |
5322 window heuristically in a way designed to get useful information onto | |
5323 the screen. | |
5324 | |
5325 ** C-M-r is now reverse incremental regexp search. | |
5326 | |
5327 ** M-z now kills through the target character. In version 18, it | |
5328 killed up to but not including the target character. | |
5329 | |
5330 ** M-! now runs the specified shell command asynchronously if it | |
5331 ends in `&' (just as the shell does). | |
5332 | |
5333 ** C-h C-f and C-h C-k are new help commands that display the Info | |
5334 node for a given Emacs function name or key sequence, respectively. | |
5335 | |
5336 ** The C-h p command system lets you find Emacs Lisp packages by | |
5337 topic keywords. Here is a partial list of package categories: | |
5338 | |
5339 abbrev abbreviation handling, typing shortcuts, macros | |
5340 bib code related to the bib bibliography processor | |
5341 c C and C++ language support | |
5342 calendar calendar and time management support | |
5343 comm communications, networking, remote access to files | |
5344 docs support for Emacs documentation | |
5345 emulations emulations of other editors | |
5346 extensions Emacs Lisp language extensions | |
5347 games games, jokes and amusements | |
5348 hardware support for interfacing with exotic hardware | |
5349 help support for on-line help systems | |
5350 i14n internationalization and alternate character-set support | |
5351 internal code for Emacs internals, build process, defaults | |
5352 languages specialized modes for editing programming languages | |
5353 lisp Lisp support, including Emacs Lisp | |
5354 local code local to your site | |
5355 maint maintenance aids for the Emacs development group | |
5356 mail modes for electronic-mail handling | |
5357 news support for netnews reading and posting | |
5358 processes process, subshell, compilation, and job control support | |
5359 terminals support for terminal types | |
5360 tex code related to the TeX formatter | |
5361 tools programming tools | |
5362 unix front-ends/assistants for, or emulators of, UNIX features | |
5363 vms support code for vms | |
5364 wp word processing | |
5365 | |
5366 More will be added soon. | |
5367 | |
5368 ** The command to split a window into two side-by-side windows is now | |
5369 C-x 3. It was C-x 5. | |
5370 | |
5371 ** M-. (find-tag) no longer has any effect on what M-, will do | |
5372 subsequently. You can no longer use M-, to find the next similar tag; | |
5373 you must use M-. with a prefix argument, instead. | |
5374 | |
5375 The motive for this change is so that you can more reliably use | |
5376 M-, to resume a suspended `tags-search' or `tags-query-replace'. | |
5377 | |
5378 ** C-x s (`save-some-buffers') now gives you more options when it asks | |
5379 whether to save a particular buffer. In addition to `y' or `n', you | |
5380 can answer `!' to save all the remaining buffers, `.' to save this | |
5381 buffer but not save any others, ESC to stop saving and exit the | |
5382 command, and C-h to get help. These options are analogous to those | |
5383 of `query-replace'. | |
5384 | |
5385 ** M-x make-symbolic-link does not expand its first argument. | |
5386 This lets you make a link with a target that is a relative file name. | |
5387 | |
5388 ** M-x add-change-log-entry and C-x 4 a now automatically insert the | |
5389 name of the file and often the name of the function that you changed. | |
5390 They also handle grouping of entries. | |
5391 | |
5392 There is now a special major mode for editing ChangeLog files. It | |
5393 makes filling work conveniently. Each bunch of grouped entries is one | |
5394 paragraph, and each collection of entries from one person on one day | |
5395 is considered a page. | |
5396 | |
5397 ** The `comment-region' command adds comment delimiters to the lines that | |
5398 start in the region, thus commenting them out. With a negative argument, | |
5399 it deletes comment delimiters from the lines in the region--this cancels | |
5400 the effect of `comment-region' without an argument. | |
5401 | |
5402 With a positive argument, `comment-region' adds comment delimiters | |
5403 but duplicates the last character of the comment start sequence as many | |
5404 times as the argument specifies. This is a way of calling attention to | |
5405 the comment. In Lisp, you should use an argument at least two, because | |
5406 the indentation convention for single semicolon comments does not leave | |
5407 them at the beginning of a line. | |
5408 | |
5409 ** If `split-window-keep-point' is non-nil, C-x 2 tries to avoid | |
5410 shifting any text on the screen by putting point in whichever window | |
5411 happens to contain the screen line the cursor is already on. | |
5412 The default is that `split-window-keep-point' is non-nil on slow | |
5413 terminals. | |
5414 | |
5415 ** M-x super-apropos is like M-x apropos except that it searches both | |
5416 Lisp symbol names and documentation strings for matches. It describes | |
5417 every symbol that has a match in either the symbol's name or its | |
5418 documentation. | |
5419 | |
5420 Both M-x apropos and M-x super-apropos take an optional second | |
5421 argument DO-ALL which controls the more expensive part of the job. | |
5422 This includes looking up and printing the key bindings of all | |
5423 commands. It also includes checking documentation strings in | |
5424 super-apropos. DO-ALL is nil by default; use a prefix arg to make it | |
5425 non-nil. | |
5426 | |
5427 ** M-x revert-buffer no longer offers to revert from a recent auto-save | |
5428 file unless you give it a prefix argument. Otherwise it always | |
5429 reverts from the real file regardless of whether there has been an | |
5430 auto-save since thenm. (Reverting from the auto-save file is no longer | |
5431 very useful now that the undo capacity is larger.) | |
5432 | |
5433 ** M-x recover-file no longer turns off Auto Save mode when it reads | |
5434 the last Auto Save file. | |
5435 | |
5436 ** M-x rename-buffer, if you give it a prefix argument, | |
5437 avoids errors by modifying the new name to make it unique. | |
5438 | |
5439 ** M-x rename-uniquely renames the current buffer to a similar name | |
5440 with a numeric suffix added to make it both different and unique. | |
5441 | |
5442 One use of this command is for creating multiple shell buffers. | |
5443 If you rename your shell buffer, and then do M-x shell again, it | |
5444 makes a new shell buffer. This method is also good for mail buffers, | |
5445 compilation buffers, and any Emacs feature which creates a special | |
5446 buffer with a particular name. | |
5447 | |
5448 ** M-x compare-windows with a prefix argument ignores changes in whitespace. | |
5449 If `compare-ignore-case' is non-nil, then differences in case are also | |
5450 ignored. | |
5451 | |
5452 ** `backward-paragraph' is now bound to M-{ by default, and `forward-paragraph' | |
5453 to M-}. Originally, these commands were bound to M-[ and M-], but they were | |
5454 running into conflicts with the use of function keys. On many terminals, | |
5455 function keys send a sequence beginning ESC-[, so many users have defined this | |
5456 as a prefix key. | |
5457 | |
5458 ** C-x C-u (upcase-region) and C-x C-l (downcase-region) are now disabled by | |
5459 default; these commands seem to be often hit by accident, and can be | |
5460 quite destructive if their effects are not noticed immediately. | |
5461 | |
5462 ** The function `erase-buffer' is now interactive, but disabled by default. | |
5463 | |
5464 ** When visiting a new file, Emacs attempts to abbreviate the file's | |
5465 path using the symlinks listed in `directory-abbrev-alist'. | |
5466 | |
5467 ** When you visit the same file in under two names that translate into | |
5468 the same name once symbolic links are handled, Emacs warns you that | |
5469 you have two buffers for the same file. | |
5470 | |
5471 ** If you wish to avoid visiting the same file in two buffers under | |
5472 different names, set the variable `find-file-existing-other-name' | |
5473 non-nil. Then `find-file' uses the existing buffer visiting the file, | |
5474 no matter which of the file's names you specify. | |
5475 | |
5476 ** If you set `find-file-visit-truename' non-nil, then the file name | |
5477 recorded for a buffer is the file's truename (in which all symbolic | |
5478 links have been removed), rather than the name you specify. Setting | |
5479 `find-file-visit-truename' also implies the effect of | |
5480 `find-file-existing-other-name'. | |
5481 | |
5482 ** C-x C-v now inserts the entire current file name in the minibuffer. | |
5483 This is convenient if you made a small mistake in typing it. Point | |
5484 goes after the last slash, before the last file name component, so if | |
5485 you want to replace it entirely, you can use C-k right away to delete | |
5486 it. | |
5487 | |
5488 ** Commands such as C-M-f in Lisp mode now ignore parentheses within comments. | |
5489 | |
5490 ** C-x q now uses ESC to terminate all iterations of the keyboard | |
5491 macro, rather than C-d as before. | |
5492 | |
5493 ** Use the command `setenv' to set an individual environment variable | |
5494 for Emacs subprocesses. Specify a variable name and a value, both as | |
5495 strings. This command applies only to subprocesses yet to be | |
5496 started. | |
5497 | |
5498 ** Use `rot13-other-window' to examine a buffer with rot13. | |
5499 | |
5500 This command does not change the text in the buffer. Instead, it | |
5501 creates a window with a funny display table that applies the code when | |
5502 displaying the text. | |
5503 | |
5504 ** The command `M-x version' now prints the current Emacs version; The | |
5505 `version' command is an alias for the `emacs-version' command. | |
5506 | |
5507 ** More complex changes in existing packages. | |
5508 | |
5509 *** `fill-nonuniform-paragraphs' is a new command, much like | |
5510 `fill-individual-paragraphs' except that only separator lines separate | |
5511 paragraphs. Since this means that the lines of one paragraph may have | |
5512 different amounts of indentation, the fill prefix used is the smallest | |
5513 amount of indentation of any of the lines of the paragraph. | |
5514 | |
5515 *** Filling is now partially controlled by a new minor mode, Adaptive | |
5516 Fill mode. When this mode is enabled (and it is enabled by default), | |
5517 if you use M-x fill-region-as-paragraph on an indented paragraph and | |
5518 you don't have a fill prefix, it uses the indentation of the second | |
5519 line of the paragraph as the fill prefix. | |
5520 | |
5521 Adaptive Fill mode doesn't have much effect on M-q in most major | |
5522 modes, because an indented line will probably count as a paragraph | |
5523 starter and thus each line of an indented paragraph will be considered | |
5524 a paragraph of its own. | |
5525 | |
5526 *** M-q in C mode now runs `c-fill-paragraph', which is designed | |
5527 for filling C comments. (We assume you don't want to fill | |
5528 the code in a C program.) | |
5529 | |
5530 *** M-$ now runs the Ispell program instead of the Unix spell program. | |
5531 | |
5532 M-$ starts an Ispell process the first time you use it. But the process | |
5533 stays alive, so that subsequent uses of M-$ run very fast. | |
5534 If you want to get rid of the process, use M-x kill-ispell. | |
5535 | |
5536 To check the entire current buffer, use M-x ispell-buffer. | |
5537 Use M-x ispell-region to check just the current region. | |
5538 | |
5539 Ispell commands often involve interactive replacement of words. | |
5540 You can interrupt the interactive replacement with C-g. | |
5541 You can restart it again afterward with C-u M-$. | |
5542 | |
5543 During interactive replacement, you can type the following characters: | |
5544 | |
5545 a Accept this word this time. | |
5546 DIGIT Replace the word (this time) with one of the displayed near-misses. | |
5547 The digit you use says which near-miss to use. | |
5548 i Insert this word in your private dictionary | |
5549 so that Ispell will consider it correct it from now on. | |
5550 r Replace the word this time with a string typed by you. | |
5551 | |
5552 When the Ispell process starts, it reads your private dictionary which | |
5553 is the file `~/ispell.words'. If you "insert" words with the `i' command, | |
5554 these words are added to that file, but not right away--only at the end | |
5555 of the interactive replacement process. | |
5556 | |
5557 Use M-x reload-ispell to reload your private dictionary from | |
5558 `~/ispell.words' if you edit it outside of Ispell. | |
5559 | |
5560 ** Changes in existing modes. | |
5561 | |
5562 *** gdb-mode has been replaced by gud-mode. | |
5563 | |
5564 The package gud.el (Grand Unified Debugger) replaces gdb.el in Emacs | |
5565 19. It provides a gdb.el-like interface to any of three debuggers; | |
5566 gdb itself, the sdb debugger supported on some Unix systems, or the | |
5567 dbx debugger on Berkeley systems. | |
5568 | |
5569 You start it up with one of the commands M-x gdb, M-x sdb, or | |
5570 M-x dbx. Each entry point finishes by executing a hook; gdb-mode-hook, | |
5571 sdb-mode-hook or dbx-mode-hook respectively. | |
5572 | |
5573 These bindings have changed: | |
5574 C-x C-a > gud-down (was M-d) | |
5575 C-x C-a < gud-up (was M-u) | |
5576 C-x C-a C-r gud-cont (was M-c) | |
5577 C-x C-a C-n gud-next (was M-n) | |
5578 C-x C-a C-s gud-step (was M-s) | |
5579 C-x C-a C-i gud-stepi (was M-i) | |
5580 C-x C-a C-l gud-recenter (was C-l) | |
5581 C-d comint-delchar-or-maybe-eof (was C-c C-d) | |
5582 | |
5583 These bindings have been removed: | |
5584 C-c C-r (was comint-show-output; now gud-cont) | |
5585 | |
5586 Since GUD mode uses comint, it uses comint's input history commands, | |
5587 superseding C-c C-y (copy-last-shell-input): | |
5588 M-p comint-next-input | |
5589 M-n comint-previous-input | |
5590 M-r comint-previous-similar-input | |
5591 M-s comint-next-similar-input | |
5592 M-C-r comint-previous-input-matching | |
5593 | |
5594 The C-x C-a bindings are also active in source files. | |
5595 | |
5596 *** The old TeX mode bindings of M-{ and M-} have been moved to C-c { | |
5597 and C-c }. (These commands are `up-list' and `tex-insert-braces'; | |
5598 they are the TeX equivalents of M-( and M-).) This is because M-{ | |
5599 and M-} are now globally defined commands. | |
5600 | |
5601 *** Changes in Mail mode. | |
5602 | |
5603 `%' is now a word-separator character in Mail mode. | |
5604 | |
5605 `mail-signature', if non-nil, tells M-x mail to insert your | |
5606 `.signature' file automatically. If you don't want your signature in | |
5607 a particular message, just delete it before you send the message. | |
5608 | |
5609 You can specify the text to insert at the beginning of each line when | |
5610 you use C-c C-y to yank the message you are replying to. Set | |
5611 `mail-yank-prefix' to the desired string. A value of `nil' (the | |
5612 default) means to use indentation, as in Emacs 18. If you use just | |
5613 C-u as the prefix argument to C-c C-y, then it does not insert | |
5614 anything at the beginning of the lines, regardless of the value of | |
5615 `mail-yank-prefix'. | |
5616 | |
5617 If you like, you can expand mail aliases as abbrevs, as soon as you | |
5618 type them in. To enable this feature, execute the following: | |
5619 | |
5620 (add-hook 'mail-setup-hook 'mail-abbrevs-setup) | |
5621 | |
5622 This can go in your .emacs file. | |
5623 | |
5624 Word abbrevs don't expand unless you insert a word-separator character | |
5625 afterward. Any mail aliases that you didn't expand at insertion time | |
5626 are expanded subsequently when you send the message. | |
5627 | |
5628 *** Changes in Rmail. | |
5629 | |
5630 Rmail by default gets new mail only from the system inbox file, | |
5631 not from `~/mbox'. | |
5632 | |
5633 In Rmail, you can retry sending a message that failed | |
5634 by typing `M-m' on the failure message. | |
5635 | |
5636 By contrast, another new command M-x rmail-resend is used for | |
5637 forwarding a message and marking it as "resent from" you | |
5638 with header fields "Resent-From:" and "Resent-To:". | |
5639 | |
5640 `e' is now the command to edit a message. | |
5641 To expunge, type `x'. We know this will surprise people | |
5642 some of the time, but the surprise will not be disastrous--if | |
5643 you type `e' meaning to expunge, just turn off editing with C-c C-c | |
5644 and then type `x'. | |
5645 | |
5646 Another new Rmail command is `<', which moves to the first message. | |
5647 This is for symmetry with `>'. | |
5648 | |
5649 Use the `b' command to bury the Rmail buffer and its summary buffer, | |
5650 if any, removing both of them from display on the screen. | |
5651 | |
5652 The variable `rmail-output-file-alist' now controls the default | |
5653 for the file to output a message to. | |
5654 | |
5655 In the Rmail summary buffer, all cursor motion commands select | |
5656 the message you move to. It's really neat when you use | |
5657 incremental search. | |
5658 | |
5659 You can now issue most Rmail commands from an Rmail summary buffer. | |
5660 The commands do the same thing in that buffer that they do in the | |
5661 Rmail buffer. They apply to the message that is selected in the Rmail | |
5662 buffer, which is always the one described by the current summary | |
5663 line. | |
5664 | |
5665 Conversely, motion and deletion commands in the Rmail buffer also | |
5666 update the summary buffer. If you set the variable | |
5667 `rmail-redisplay-summary' to a non-nil value, then they bring the | |
5668 summary buffer (if one exists) back onto the screen. | |
5669 | |
5670 C-M-t is a new command to make a summary by topic. It uses regexp | |
5671 matching against just the subjects of the messages to decide which | |
5672 messages to show in the summary. | |
5673 | |
5674 You can easily convert an Rmail file to system mailbox format with the | |
5675 command `unrmail'. This command reads two arguments, the name of | |
5676 the Rmail file to convert, and the name of the new mailbox file. | |
5677 (This command does not change the Rmail file itself.) | |
5678 | |
5679 Rmail now handles Content Length fields in messages. | |
5680 | |
5681 *** `mail-extract-address-components' unpacks mail addresses. | |
5682 It takes an address as a string (the contents of the From field, for | |
5683 example) and returns a list of the form (FULL-NAME | |
5684 CANONICAL-ADDRESS). | |
5685 | |
5686 *** Changes in C mode and C-related commands. | |
5687 | |
5688 **** M-x c-up-conditional | |
5689 | |
5690 In C mode, `c-up-conditional' moves back to the containing | |
5691 preprocessor conditional, setting the mark where point was | |
5692 previously. | |
5693 | |
5694 A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a negative argument, | |
5695 this command moves forward to the end of the containing preprocessor | |
5696 conditional. When going backwards, `#elif' acts like `#else' followed | |
5697 by `#if'. When going forwards, `#elif' is ignored. | |
5698 | |
5699 **** In C mode, M-a and M-e are now defined as | |
5700 `c-beginning-of-statement' and `c-end-of-statement'. | |
5701 | |
5702 **** In C mode, M-x c-backslash-region is a new command to insert or | |
5703 align `\' characters at the ends of the lines of the region, except | |
5704 for the last such line. This is useful after writing or editing a C | |
5705 macro definition. | |
5706 | |
5707 If a line already ends in `\', this command adjusts the amount of | |
5708 whitespace before it. Otherwise, it inserts a new `\'. | |
5709 | |
5710 *** New features in info. | |
5711 | |
5712 When Info looks for an Info file, it searches the directories | |
5713 in `Info-directory-list'. This makes it easy to install the Info files | |
5714 that come with various packages. You can specify the path with | |
5715 the environment variable INFOPATH. | |
5716 | |
5717 There are new commands in Info mode. | |
5718 | |
5719 `]' now moves forward a node, going up and down levels as needed. | |
5720 `[' is similar but moves backward. These two commands try to traverse | |
5721 the entire Info tree, node by node. They are the equivalent of reading | |
5722 a printed manual sequentially. | |
5723 | |
5724 `<' moves to the top node of the current Info file. | |
5725 `>' moves to the last node of the file. | |
5726 | |
5727 SPC scrolls through the current node; at the end, it advances to the | |
5728 next node in depth-first order (like `]'). | |
5729 | |
5730 DEL scrolls backwards in the current node; at the end, it moves to the | |
5731 previous node in depth-first order (like `['). | |
5732 | |
5733 After a menu select, the info `up' command now restores point in the | |
5734 menu. The combination of this and the previous two changes means that | |
5735 repeated SPC keystrokes do the right (depth-first traverse forward) thing. | |
5736 | |
5737 `i STRING RET' moves to the node associated with STRING in the index | |
5738 or indices of this manual. If there is more than one match for | |
5739 STRING, the `i' command finds the first match. | |
5740 | |
5741 `,' finds the next match for the string in the previous `i' command | |
5742 | |
5743 If you click the middle mouse button near a cross-reference, | |
5744 menu item or node pointer while in Info, you will go to the node | |
5745 which is referenced. | |
5746 | |
5747 *** Changes in M-x compile. | |
5748 | |
5749 You can repeat any previous compilation command conveniently using the | |
5750 minibuffer history commands, while in the minibuffer entering the | |
5751 compilation command. | |
5752 | |
5753 While a compilation is going on, the string `Compiling' appears in | |
5754 the mode line. When this string disappears, that tells you the | |
5755 compilation is finished. | |
5756 | |
5757 The buffer of compiler messages is in Compilation mode. This mode | |
5758 provides the keys SPC and DEL to scroll by screenfuls, and M-n and M-p | |
5759 to move to the next or previous error message. You can also use C-c | |
5760 C-c on any error message to find the corresponding source code. | |
5761 | |
5762 Emacs 19 has a more general parser for compiler messages. For example, it | |
5763 can understand messages from lint, and from certain C compilers whose error | |
5764 message format is unusual. Also, it only parses until it sees the error | |
5765 message you want; you never have to wait a long time to see the first | |
5766 error, no matter how big the buffer is. | |
5767 | |
5768 *** M-x diff and M-x diff-backup. | |
5769 | |
5770 This new command compares two files, displaying the differences in an | |
5771 Emacs buffer. The options for the `diff' program come from the | |
5772 variable `diff-switches', whose value should be a string. | |
5773 | |
5774 The buffer of differences has Compilation mode as its major mode, so you | |
5775 can use C-x ` to visit successive changed locations in the two | |
5776 source files, or you can move to a particular hunk of changes and type | |
5777 C-c C-c to move to the corresponding source. You can also use the | |
5778 other special commands of Compilation mode: SPC and DEL for | |
5779 scrolling, and M-n and M-p for cursor motion. | |
5780 | |
5781 M-x diff-backup compares a file with its most recent backup. | |
5782 If you specify the name of a backup file, `diff-backup' compares it | |
5783 with the source file that it is a backup of. | |
5784 | |
5785 *** The View commands (such as M-x view-buffer and M-x view-file) no | |
5786 longer use recursive edits; instead, they switch temporarily to a | |
5787 different major mode (View mode) specifically designed for moving | |
5788 around through a buffer without editing it. | |
5789 | |
5790 *** Changes in incremental search. | |
5791 | |
5792 **** The character to terminate an incremental search is now RET. | |
5793 This is for compatibility with the way most other arguments are read. | |
5794 | |
5795 To search for a newline in an incremental search, type LFD (also known | |
5796 as C-j). | |
5797 | |
5798 **** Incremental search now maintains a ring of previous search | |
5799 strings. Use M-p and M-n to move through the ring to pick a search | |
5800 string to reuse. These commands leave the selected search ring | |
5801 element in the minibuffer, where you can edit it. Type C-s or C-r to | |
5802 finish editing and search for the chosen string. | |
5803 | |
5804 **** If you type an upper case letter in incremental search, that turns | |
5805 off case-folding, so that you get a case-sensitive search. | |
5806 | |
5807 **** If you type a space during regexp incremental search, it matches | |
5808 any sequence of whitespace characters. If you want to match just a space, | |
5809 type C-q SPC. | |
5810 | |
5811 **** Incremental search is now implemented as a major mode. When you | |
5812 type C-s, it switches temporarily to a different keymap which defines | |
5813 each key to do what it ought to do for incremental search. This has | |
5814 next to no effect on the user-visible behavior of searching, but makes | |
5815 it easier to customize that behavior. | |
5816 | |
5817 Emacs 19 eliminates the old variables `search-...-char' that used to | |
5818 be the way to specify the characters to use for various special | |
5819 purposes in incremental search. Instead, you can define the meaning | |
5820 of a character in incremental search by modifying `isearch-mode-map'. | |
5821 | |
5822 *** New commands in Buffer Menu mode. | |
5823 | |
5824 The command C-o now displays the current line's buffer in another | |
5825 window but does not select it. This is like the existing command `o' | |
5826 which selects the current line's buffer in another window. | |
5827 | |
5828 The command % toggles the read-only flag of the current line's buffer. | |
5829 | |
5830 The way to switch to a set of several buffers, including those marked | |
5831 with m, is now v. The q command simply quits, replacing the buffer | |
5832 menu buffer with the buffer that was displayed previously. | |
5833 | |
5834 ** New major modes and packages. | |
5835 | |
5836 *** The news reader GNUS is now installed. | |
5837 | |
5838 *** There is a new interface for version control systems, called VC. | |
5839 It works with both RCS and SCCS; in fact, you don't really have to | |
5840 know which one of them is being used, because it automatically deals | |
5841 with either one. | |
5842 | |
5843 Most of the time, the only command you have to know about is C-x C-q. | |
5844 This command normally toggles the read-only flag of the current | |
5845 buffer. If the buffer is visiting a file that is maintained with a | |
5846 version control system, the command still toggles read-only, but does | |
5847 so by checking the file in or checking it out. | |
5848 | |
5849 When you check a file in, VC asks you for a log entry by popping up a | |
5850 buffer. Edit the entry there, then type C-c C-c when it is ready. | |
5851 That's when the actual checkin happens. If you change your mind about | |
5852 the checkin, simply switch buffers and don't ever go back to the log | |
5853 buffer. | |
5854 | |
5855 To start using version control for a file, use the command C-x v v. | |
5856 This works like C-x C-q (performing the next logical version-control | |
5857 operation needed to change the file's writability) but it will also | |
5858 perform initial checkin on an unregistered file. | |
5859 | |
5860 By default, VC uses RCS if RCS is installed on your machine; | |
5861 otherwise, SCCS. If you want to make the choice explicitly, you can do | |
5862 it by setting `vc-default-back-end' to the symbol `RCS' or the symbol | |
5863 `SCCS'. | |
5864 | |
5865 You can tell when a file you visit is maintained with version control | |
5866 because either `RCS' or `SCCS' appears in the mode line. | |
5867 | |
5868 *** A new Calendar mode has been added, the work of Edward M. Reingold. | |
5869 The mode can display the Gregorian calendar and a variety of other | |
5870 calendars at any date, and interacts with a diary facility similar to | |
5871 the UNIX `calendar' utility. | |
5872 | |
5873 *** There is a new major mode for editing binary files: Hexl mode. | |
5874 To use it, use M-x hexl-find-file instead of C-x C-f to visit the file. | |
5875 This command converts the file's contents to hexadecimal and lets you | |
5876 edit the translation. When you save the file, it is converted | |
5877 automatically back to binary. | |
5878 | |
5879 You can also use M-x hexl-mode to translate an existing buffer into hex. | |
5880 Do this if you have already visited a binary file. | |
5881 | |
5882 Hexl mode has a few other commands: | |
5883 | |
5884 C-M-d insert a byte with a code typed in decimal. | |
5885 C-M-o insert a byte with a code typed in octal. | |
5886 C-M-x insert a byte with a code typed in hex. | |
5887 | |
5888 C-x [ move to the beginning of a 1k-byte "page". | |
5889 C-x ] move to the end of a 1k-byte "page". | |
5890 | |
5891 M-g go to an address specified in hex. | |
5892 M-j go to an address specified in decimal. | |
5893 | |
5894 C-c C-c leave hexl mode and go back to the previous major mode. | |
5895 | |
5896 *** Miscellaneous new major modes include Awk mode, Icon mode, Makefile | |
5897 mode, Perl mode and SGML mode. | |
5898 | |
5899 *** Edebug, a new source-level debugger for Emacs Lisp functions. | |
5900 | |
5901 To use Edebug, use the command M-x edebug-defun to "evaluate" a | |
5902 function definition in an Emacs Lisp file. We put "evaluate" in | |
5903 quotation marks because it doesn't just evaluate the function, it also | |
5904 inserts additional information to support source-level debugging. | |
5905 | |
5906 You must also do | |
5907 | |
5908 (setq debugger 'edebug-debug) | |
5909 | |
5910 to cause errors and single-stepping to use Edebug instead of the usual | |
5911 Emacs Lisp debugger. | |
5912 | |
5913 For more information, see the Edebug manual, which should be included | |
5914 in the Emacs distribution. | |
5915 | |
5916 *** C++ mode is like C mode, except that it understands C++ comment syntax | |
5917 and certain other differences between C and C++. It also has a command | |
5918 `fill-c++-comment' which fills a paragraph made of comment lines. | |
5919 | |
5920 The command `comment-region' is useful in C++ mode for commenting out | |
5921 several consecutive lines, or removing the commenting out of such lines. | |
5922 | |
5923 *** A new package for merging two variants of the same text. | |
5924 | |
5925 It's not unusual for programmers to get their signals crossed and | |
5926 modify the same program in two different directions. Then somebody | |
5927 has to merge the two versions. The command `emerge-files' makes this | |
5928 easier. | |
5929 | |
5930 `emerge-files' reads two file names and compares them. Then it | |
5931 displays three buffers: one for each file, and one for the | |
5932 differences. | |
5933 | |
5934 If the original version of the file is available, you can make things | |
5935 even easier using `emerge-files-with-ancestor'. It reads three file | |
5936 names--variant 1, variant 2, and the common ancestor--and uses diff3 | |
5937 to compare them. | |
5938 | |
5939 You control the merging interactively. The main loop of Emerge | |
5940 consists of showing you one set of differences, asking you what to do | |
5941 about them, and doing it. You have a choice of two modes for giving | |
5942 directions to Emerge: "fast" mode and "edit" mode. | |
5943 | |
5944 In Fast mode, Emerge commands are single characters, and ordinary | |
5945 Emacs commands are disabled. This makes Emerge operations fast, but | |
5946 prevents you from doing more than selecting the A or the B version of | |
5947 differences. In Edit mode, all emerge commands use the C-c prefix, | |
5948 and the usual Emacs commands are available. This allows editing the | |
5949 merge buffer, but slows down Emerge operations. Edit and fast modes | |
5950 are indicated by `F' and `E' in the minor modes in the mode line. | |
5951 | |
5952 The Emerge commands are: | |
5953 | |
5954 p go to the previous difference | |
5955 n go to the next difference | |
5956 a select the A version of this difference | |
5957 b select the B version of this difference | |
5958 j go to a particular difference (prefix argument | |
5959 specifies which difference) (0j suppresses display of | |
5960 the flags) | |
5961 q quit - finish the merge* | |
5962 f go into fast mode | |
5963 e go into edit mode | |
5964 l recenter (C-l) all three windows* | |
5965 - and 0 through 9 | |
5966 prefix numeric arguments | |
5967 d a select the A version as the default from here down in | |
5968 the merge buffer* | |
5969 d b select the B version as the default from here down in | |
5970 the merge buffer* | |
5971 c a copy the A version of the difference into the kill | |
5972 ring | |
5973 c b copy the B version of the difference into the kill | |
5974 ring | |
5975 i a insert the A version of the difference at the point | |
5976 i b insert the B version of the difference at the point | |
5977 m put the point and mark around the difference region | |
5978 ^ scroll-down (like M-v) the three windows* | |
5979 v scroll-up (like C-v) the three windows* | |
5980 < scroll-left (like C-x <) the three windows* | |
5981 > scroll-right (like C-x >) the three windows* | |
5982 | reset horizontal scroll on the three windows* | |
5983 x 1 shrink the merge window to one line (use C-u l to restore it | |
5984 to full size) | |
5985 x a find the difference containing a location in the A buffer* | |
5986 x b find the difference containing a location in the B buffer* | |
5987 x c combine the two versions of this difference* | |
5988 x C combine the two versions of this difference, using a | |
5989 register's value as the template* | |
5990 x d find the difference containing a location in the merge buffer* | |
5991 x f show the files/buffers Emerge is operating on in Help window | |
5992 (use C-u l to restore windows) | |
5993 x j join this difference with the following one | |
5994 (C-u x j joins this difference with the previous one) | |
5995 x l show line numbers of points in A, B, and merge buffers | |
5996 x m change major mode of merge buffer* | |
5997 x s split this difference into two differences | |
5998 (first position the point in all three buffers to the places | |
5999 to split the difference) | |
6000 x t trim identical lines off top and bottom of difference | |
6001 (such lines occur when the A and B versions are | |
6002 identical but differ from the ancestor version) | |
6003 x x set the template for the x c command* | |
6004 | |
6005 Normally, the merged output goes back in the first file specified. | |
6006 If you use a prefix argument, Emerge reads another file name to use | |
6007 for the output file. | |
6008 | |
6009 Once Emerge has prepared the buffer of differences, it runs the hooks | |
6010 in `emerge-startup-hooks'. | |
6011 | |
6012 *** Asm mode is a new major mode for editing files of assembler code. | |
6013 It defines these commands: | |
6014 | |
6015 TAB tab-to-tab-stop. | |
6016 LFD Insert a newline and then indent using tab-to-tab-stop. | |
6017 : Insert a colon and then remove the indentation | |
6018 from before the label preceding colon. Then tab-to-tab-stop. | |
6019 ; Insert or align a comment. | |
6020 | |
6021 *** Two-column mode lets you conveniently edit two side-by-side columns | |
6022 of text. It works using two side-by-side windows, each showing its | |
6023 own buffer. | |
6024 | |
6025 Here are three ways to enter two-column mode: | |
6026 | |
6027 C-x 6 2 makes the current buffer into the left-hand buffer. In the | |
6028 right-hand window it puts a buffer whose name is based on the current | |
6029 buffer's name. | |
6030 | |
6031 C-x 6 b BUFFER RET makes the current buffer into the left-hand buffer, | |
6032 and uses buffer BUFFER as the right-hand buffer. | |
6033 | |
6034 C-x 6 s splits the current buffer, which contains two-column text, | |
6035 into two side-by-side buffers. The old current buffer becomes the | |
6036 left-hand buffer, but the text in the right column is moved into the | |
6037 right-hand buffer. The current column specifies the split point. | |
6038 Splitting starts with the current line and continues to the end of the | |
6039 buffer. | |
6040 | |
6041 C-x 6 s takes a prefix argument which specifies how many characters | |
6042 before point constitute the column separator. (The default argument | |
6043 is 1, as usual, so by default the column separator is the character | |
6044 before point.) Lines that don't have the column separator at the | |
6045 proper place remain unsplit; they stay in the left-hand buffer, and | |
6046 the right-hand buffer gets an empty line to correspond. | |
6047 | |
6048 You can scroll both buffers together using C-x 6 SPC (scroll up), C-x | |
6049 6 DEL (scroll down), and C-x 6 RET (scroll up one line). C-x 6 C-l | |
6050 recenters both buffers together. | |
6051 | |
6052 If you want to make a line which will span both columns, put it in | |
6053 the left-hand buffer, with an empty line in the corresponding place in | |
6054 the right-hand buffer. | |
6055 | |
6056 When you have edited both buffers as you wish, merge them with C-x 6 | |
6057 1. This copies the text from the right-hand buffer as a second column | |
6058 in the other buffer. To go back to two-column editing, use C-x 6 s. | |
6059 | |
6060 Use C-x 6 d to disassociate the two buffers, leaving each as it | |
6061 stands. (If the other buffer, the one that was not current when you | |
6062 type C-x 6 d, is empty, C-x 6 d kills it.) | |
6063 | |
6064 *** You can supply command arguments such as files to visit to an Emacs | |
6065 that is already running. To do this, you must do this in your .emacs | |
6066 file: | |
6067 (add-hook 'suspend-hook 'resume-suspend-hook) | |
6068 Also you must use the shellscript emacs.csh or emacs.sh, found in the | |
6069 etc subdirectory. | |
6070 | |
6071 *** Shell mode has been completely replaced. | |
6072 The basic idea is the same, but there are new commands available in | |
6073 this mode. | |
6074 | |
6075 TAB now completes the file name before point in the shell buffer. | |
6076 To get a list of all possible completions, type M-?. | |
6077 | |
6078 There is a new convenient history mechanism for repeating previous | |
6079 commands. Use the command M-p to recall the last command; it copies | |
6080 the text of that command to the place where you are editing. If you | |
6081 repeat M-p, it replaces the copied command with the previous command. | |
6082 M-n is similar but goes in the opposite direction towards the present. | |
6083 When you find the command you wanted, you can edit it, or just | |
6084 resubmit it by typing RET. | |
6085 | |
6086 You can also use M-r and M-s to search for (respectively) earlier or | |
6087 later inputs starting with a given string. First type the string, | |
6088 then type M-r to yank a previous input from the history which starts | |
6089 with that string. You can repeat M-r to find successively earlier | |
6090 inputs starting with the same string. You can start moving in the | |
6091 opposite direction (toward more recent inputs) by typing M-s instead | |
6092 of M-r. As long as you don't use any commands except M-r and M-s, | |
6093 they keep using the same string that you had entered initially. | |
6094 | |
6095 C-c C-o kills the last batch of output from a shell command. This is | |
6096 useful if a shell command spews out lots of output that just gets in | |
6097 the way. | |
6098 | |
6099 C-c C-r scrolls to display the beginning of the last batch of output | |
6100 at the top of the window; it also moves the cursor there. | |
6101 | |
6102 C-a on a line that starts with a shell prompt moves to the end of the | |
6103 prompt, not to the very beginning of the line. | |
6104 | |
6105 C-d typed at the end of the shell buffer sends EOF to the subshell. | |
6106 At any other position in the buffer, it deletes a character as usual. | |
6107 | |
6108 If Emacs gets confused while trying to track changes in the shell's | |
6109 current directory, type M-x dirs to re-synchronize. | |
6110 | |
6111 M-x send-invisible reads a line of text without echoing it, and | |
6112 sends it to the shell. | |
6113 | |
6114 If you accidentally suspend your process, use M-x comint-continue-subjob | |
6115 to continue it. | |
6116 | |
6117 *** There is now a convenient way to enable flow control on terminals | |
6118 where you can't win without it. Suppose you want to do this on | |
6119 VT-100 and H19 terminals; put the following in your `.emacs' file: | |
6120 | |
6121 (enable-flow-control-on "vt100" "h19") | |
6122 | |
6123 When flow control is enabled, you must type C-\ to get the effect of a | |
6124 C-s, and type C-^ to get the effect of a C-q. | |
6125 | |
6126 The function `enable-flow-control' enables flow control unconditionally. | |
6127 | |
6128 ** Changes in Dired | |
6129 | |
6130 Dired has many new features which allow you to do these things: | |
6131 | |
6132 - Rename, copy, or make links to many files at once. | |
6133 | |
6134 - Make distinguishable types of marks for different operations. | |
6135 | |
6136 - Display contents of subdirectories in the same Dired buffer as the | |
6137 parent directory. | |
6138 | |
6139 *** Setting and Clearing Marks | |
6140 | |
6141 There are now two kinds of marker that you can put on a file in Dired: | |
6142 `D' for deletion, and `*' for any other kind of operation. | |
6143 The `x' command deletes only files marked with `D', and most | |
6144 other Dired commands operate only on the files marked with `*'. | |
6145 | |
6146 To mark files with `D' (also called "flagging" the files), you | |
6147 can use `d' as usual. Here are some commands for marking with | |
6148 `*' (and also for unmarking): | |
6149 | |
6150 **** `m' marks the current file with `*', for an operation other than | |
6151 deletion. | |
6152 | |
6153 **** `*' marks all executable files. With a prefix argument, it | |
6154 unmarks all those files. | |
6155 | |
6156 **** `@' marks all symbolic links. With a prefix argument, it unmarks | |
6157 all those files. | |
6158 | |
6159 **** `/' marks all directory files except `.' and `..'. With a prefix | |
6160 argument, it unmarks all those files. | |
6161 | |
6162 **** M-DEL removes a specific or all marks from every file. With an | |
6163 argument, queries for each marked file. Type your help character, | |
6164 usually C-h, at that time for help. | |
6165 | |
6166 **** `c' replaces all marks that use the character OLD with marks that | |
6167 use the character NEW. You can use almost any character as a mark | |
6168 character by means of this command, to distinguish various classes of | |
6169 files. If OLD is ` ', then the command operates on all unmarked | |
6170 files; if NEW is ` ', then the command unmarks the files it acts on. | |
6171 | |
6172 *** Operating on Multiple Files | |
6173 | |
6174 The Dired commands to operate directly on files (rename them, copy | |
6175 them, and so on) have been generalized to work on multiple files. | |
6176 There are also some additional commands in this series. | |
6177 | |
6178 All of these commands use the same convention to decide which files to | |
6179 manipulate: | |
6180 | |
6181 - If you give the command a numeric prefix argument @var{n}, it operates | |
6182 on the next @var{n} files, starting with the current file. | |
6183 | |
6184 - Otherwise, if there are marked files, the commands operate on all the | |
6185 marked files. | |
6186 | |
6187 - Otherwise, the command operates on the current file only. | |
6188 | |
6189 These are the commands: | |
6190 | |
6191 **** `C' copies the specified files. You must specify a directory to | |
6192 copy into, or (if copying a single file) a new name. | |
6193 | |
6194 If `dired-copy-preserve-time' is non-`nil', then copying sets | |
6195 the modification time of the new file to be the same as that of the old | |
6196 file. | |
6197 | |
6198 **** `R' renames the specified files. You must specify a directory to | |
6199 rename into, or (if renaming a single file) a new name. | |
6200 | |
6201 Dired automatically changes the visited file name of buffers associated | |
6202 with renamed files so that they refer to the new names. | |
6203 | |
6204 **** `H' makes hard links to the specified files. You must specify a | |
6205 directory to make the links in, or (if making just one link) the name | |
6206 to give the link. | |
6207 | |
6208 **** `S' makes symbolic links to the specified files. You must specify | |
6209 a directory to make the links in, or (if making just one link) the | |
6210 name to give the link. | |
6211 | |
6212 **** `M' changes the mode of the specified files. This calls the | |
6213 `chmod' program, so you can describe the desired mode change with any | |
6214 argument that `chmod' would handle. | |
6215 | |
6216 **** `G' changes the group of the specified files. | |
6217 | |
6218 **** `O' changes the owner of the specified files. (On normal systems, | |
6219 only the superuser can do this.) | |
6220 | |
6221 The variable `dired-chown-program' specifies the name of the | |
6222 program to use to do the work (different systems put `chown' in | |
6223 different places. | |
6224 | |
6225 **** `Z' compresses or uncompresses the specified files. | |
6226 | |
6227 **** `L' loads the specified Emacs Lisp files. | |
6228 | |
6229 **** `B' byte compiles the specified Emacs Lisp files. | |
6230 | |
6231 **** `P' prints the specified files. It uses the variables | |
6232 `lpr-command' and `lpr-switches' just as `lpr-file' does. | |
6233 | |
6234 *** Shell Commands in Dired | |
6235 | |
6236 `!' reads a shell command string in the minibuffer and runs the shell | |
6237 command on all the specified files. There are two ways of applying a | |
6238 shell command to multiple files: | |
6239 | |
6240 - If you use `*' in the command, then the shell command runs just | |
6241 once, with the list of file names substituted for the `*'. | |
6242 | |
6243 Thus, `! tar cf foo.tar * RET' runs `tar' on the entire list of file | |
6244 names, putting them into one tar file `foo.tar'. The file names are | |
6245 inserted in the order that they appear in the Dired buffer. | |
6246 | |
6247 - If the command string doesn't contain `*', then it runs once for | |
6248 each file, with the file name attached at the end. For example, `! | |
6249 uudecode RET' runs `uudecode' on each file. | |
6250 | |
6251 To run the shell command once for each file but without being limited | |
6252 to putting the file name inserted in the middle, use a shell loop. | |
6253 For example, this shell command would run `uuencode' on each of the | |
6254 specified files, writing the output into a corresponding `.uu' file: | |
6255 | |
6256 for file in *; uuencode $file $file >$file.uu; done | |
6257 | |
6258 The working directory for the shell command is the top level directory | |
6259 of the Dired buffer. | |
6260 | |
6261 *** Regular Expression File Name Substitution | |
6262 | |
6263 **** `% m REGEXP RET' marks all files whose names match the regular | |
6264 expression REGEXP. | |
6265 | |
6266 Only the non-directory part of the file name is used in matching. Use | |
6267 `^' and `$' to anchor matches. Exclude subdirs by hiding them. | |
6268 | |
6269 **** `% d REGEXP RET' flags for deletion all files whose names match | |
6270 the regular expression REGEXP. | |
6271 | |
6272 **** `% R', `% C', `% H', `% S' | |
6273 | |
6274 These four commands rename, copy, make hard links and make soft links, | |
6275 in each case computing the new name by regular expression substitution | |
6276 from the name of the old file. They effectively perform | |
6277 `query-replace-regexp' on the selected file names in the Dired buffer. | |
6278 | |
6279 The commands read two arguments: a regular expression, and a | |
6280 substitution pattern. Each selected file name is matched against the | |
6281 regular expression, and then the part which matched is replaced with | |
6282 the substitution pattern. You can use `\&' and `\DIGIT' in the | |
6283 substitution pattern to refer to all or part of the old file name. | |
6284 | |
6285 If the regular expression matches more than once in a file name, | |
6286 only the first match is replaced. | |
6287 | |
6288 Normally, the replacement process does not consider the directory names; | |
6289 it operates on the file name within the directory. If you specify a | |
6290 prefix argument of zero, then replacement affects entire file name. | |
6291 | |
6292 To apply the command to all files matching the same regexp that you | |
6293 use in the command, mark those files with `% m REGEXP RET', then use | |
6294 the same regular expression in `% R'. To make this easier, `% R' uses | |
6295 as a default the last regular expression specified in a `%' command. | |
6296 | |
6297 *** Dired Case Conversion | |
6298 | |
6299 **** `% u' renames each of the selected files to an upper case name. | |
6300 | |
6301 **** `% l' renames each of the selected files to a lower case name. | |
6302 | |
6303 *** File Comparison with Dired | |
6304 | |
6305 **** `=' compares the current file with another file (the file at the | |
6306 mark), by running the `diff' program. The file at the mark is given | |
6307 to `diff' first. | |
6308 | |
6309 **** `M-=' compares the current file with its backup file. If there | |
6310 are several numerical backups, it uses the most recent one. If this | |
6311 file is a backup, it is compared with its original. | |
6312 | |
6313 The backup file is the first file given to `diff'. | |
6314 | |
6315 *** Subdirectories in Dired | |
6316 | |
6317 You can display more than one directory in one Dired buffer. | |
6318 The simplest way to do this is to specify the options `-lR' for | |
6319 running `ls'. That produces a recursive directory listing showing | |
6320 all subdirectories, all within the same Dired buffer. | |
6321 | |
6322 You can also insert the contents of a particular subdirectory with the | |
6323 `i' command. Use this command on the line that describes a file which | |
6324 is a directory. Inserted subdirectory contents follow the top-level | |
6325 directory of the Dired buffer, just as they do in `ls -lR' output. | |
6326 | |
6327 If the subdirectory's contents are already present in the buffer, the | |
6328 `i' command just moves to it (type `l' to refresh it). It sets the | |
6329 Emacs mark before moving, so C-x C-x takes you back to the old | |
6330 position in the buffer. | |
6331 | |
6332 When you have subdirectories in the Dired buffer, you can use the page | |
6333 motion commands C-x [ and C-x ] to move by entire directories. | |
6334 | |
6335 The following commands move up and down in the tree of directories | |
6336 in one Dired buffer: | |
6337 | |
6338 **** C-M-u Go up to the parent directory's headerline. | |
6339 | |
6340 **** C-M-d Go down in the tree, to the first subdirectory's | |
6341 headerline. | |
6342 | |
6343 **** C-M-n Go to next subdirectory headerline, regardless of level. | |
6344 | |
6345 **** C-M-p Go to previous subdirectory headerline, regardless of | |
6346 level. | |
6347 | |
6348 *** Hiding Subdirectories | |
6349 | |
6350 "Hiding" a subdirectory means to make it invisible, except for its | |
6351 headerline. Files inside a hidden subdirectory are never considered | |
6352 by Dired. For example, the commands to operate on marked files ignore | |
6353 files in hidden directories even if they are marked. | |
6354 | |
6355 **** `$' hides or unhides the current subdirectory and move to next | |
6356 subdirectory. A prefix argument serves as a repeat count. | |
6357 | |
6358 **** `M-$' hides all subdirectories, leaving only their header lines. | |
6359 Or, if at least one subdirectory is currently hidden, it makes | |
6360 everything visible again. You can use this command to get an overview | |
6361 in very deep directory trees or to move quickly to subdirectories far | |
6362 away. | |
6363 | |
6364 *** Editing the Dired Buffer | |
6365 | |
6366 **** `l' updates the specified files in a Dired buffer. This means | |
6367 reading their current status from the file system and changing the | |
6368 buffer to reflect it properly. | |
6369 | |
6370 If you use this command on a subdirectory header line, it updates the | |
6371 contents of the subdirectory. | |
6372 | |
6373 **** `g' updates the entire contents of the Dired buffer. It preserves | |
6374 all marks except for those on files that have vanished. Hidden | |
6375 subdirectories are updated but remain hidden. | |
6376 | |
6377 **** `k' kills all marked lines (not the files). With a prefix | |
6378 argument, it kills that many lines starting with the current line. | |
6379 | |
6380 This command does not delete files; it just deletes text from the Dired | |
6381 buffer. | |
6382 | |
6383 If you kill the line for a file that is a directory, then its contents | |
6384 are also deleted from the buffer. Typing `C-u k' on the header line | |
6385 for a subdirectory is another way to delete a subdirectory from the | |
6386 Dired buffer. | |
6387 | |
6388 *** `find' and Dired. | |
6389 | |
6390 To search for files with names matching a wildcard pattern use | |
6391 `find-name-dired'. Its arguments are DIRECTORY and | |
6392 PATTERN. It selects all the files in DIRECTORY or its | |
6393 subdirectories whose own names match PATTERN. | |
6394 | |
6395 The files thus selected are displayed in a Dired buffer in which the | |
6396 ordinary Dired commands are available. | |
6397 | |
6398 If you want to test the contents of files, rather than their names, use | |
6399 `find-grep-dired'. This command takes two minibuffer arguments, | |
6400 DIRECTORY and REGEXP; it selects all the files in | |
6401 DIRECTORY or its subdirectories that contain a match for | |
6402 REGEXP. It works by running `find' and `grep'. | |
6403 | |
6404 The most general command in this series is `find-dired', which lets | |
6405 you specify any condition that `find' can test. It takes two | |
6406 minibuffer arguments, DIRECTORY and FIND-ARGS; it runs `find' in | |
6407 DIRECTORY with using FIND-ARGS as the arguments to `find' specifying | |
6408 which files to accept. To use this command, you need to know how to | |
6409 use `find'. | |
6410 | |
6411 ** New amusements and novelties. | |
6412 | |
6413 *** `M-x mpuz' displays a multiplication puzzle, in which each letter | |
6414 stands for a digit, and you must determine which digit. The puzzles | |
6415 are determined randomly, so they are always different. | |
6416 | |
6417 *** `M-x gomoku' plays the game Gomoku with you. It needs more work. | |
6418 | |
6419 *** `M-x spook' adds a line of randomly chosen keywords to an outgoing | |
6420 mail message. The keywords are chosen from a list of words that | |
6421 suggest you are discussing something subversive. | |
6422 | |
6423 The idea is that the NSA reads all messages that contain keywords | |
6424 suggesting they might be interested, and that adding these lines could | |
6425 help to overload them. I would guess that they have modified their | |
6426 program by now to ignore these lines of keywords; perhaps the program | |
6427 can be updated if some clever hacker can determine what criterion they | |
6428 actually use now. | |
6429 | |
6430 ** Installation changes | |
6431 | |
6432 *** The configure script has been provided to help with the | |
6433 installation process. It takes the place of editing the Makefiles and | |
6434 src/config.h, and can often guess the appropriate operating system to | |
6435 use for a particular machine type. See INSTALL for a more detailed | |
6436 description of the steps required for installation. | |
6437 | |
6438 *** If you create a Lisp file named `site-start.el', Emacs loads the file | |
6439 whenever it starts up. | |
6440 | |
6441 *** A new Lisp variable, `data-directory', indicates the directory | |
6442 containing the DOC file, tutorial, copying agreement, and other | |
6443 familiar `etc' files. The value of `data-directory' is a simple string. | |
6444 The default should be set at build time, and the person installing | |
6445 Emacs should place all the data files in this directory. The `help.el' | |
6446 functions that look for docstrings and information files check this | |
6447 variable. All Emacs Lisp packages should also be coded so that they | |
6448 refer to `data-directory' to find data files. | |
6449 | |
6450 *** The PURESIZE definition has been moved from config.h to its own | |
6451 file, puresize.h. Since almost every file of C source in the | |
6452 distribution depends on config.h, but only alloc.c and data.c depend | |
6453 on puresize.h, this means that changing the value of PURESIZE causes | |
6454 only those two files to be recompiled. | |
6455 | |
6456 *** The makefile at the top of the Emacs source tree now supports a | |
6457 `dist' target, which creates a compressed tar file suitable for | |
6458 distribution, using the contents of the source tree. Object files, | |
6459 old file versions, executables, DOC files, and other | |
6460 architecture-specific or easy-to-recreate files are not included in | |
6461 the tar file. | |
6462 | |
33149 | 6463 * For older news, see the file ONEWS.4. For Lisp changes in (the first |
25853 | 6464 * release of) Emacs 19, see the file LNEWS. |
6465 | |
6466 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
6467 Copyright information: | |
6468 | |
6469 Copyright (C) 1993, 1994, 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | |
6470 | |
6471 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies | |
6472 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the | |
6473 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved, | |
6474 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn. | |
6475 | |
6476 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions | |
6477 of this document, or of portions of it, | |
6478 under the above conditions, provided also that they | |
6479 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them. | |
6480 | |
6481 Local variables: | |
6482 mode: outline | |
6483 paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$" | |
6484 end: | |
6485 |